User's Guide
IMPORTANT:
Read this manual carefully before using your printer.
Save
this manual
for future reference.
Downloaded
from ManualsPrinter.com
Manuals
ENG
LBP3370
Laser Printer
User's Guide
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Manuals for the Printer
The manuals for this printer are arranged as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
CD-ROM
Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the accompanying CD-ROM.
• Installation
• Connecting to a Computer
• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting
• Installing the Printer Driver
• Printing a Document
• Using the Supplied Software
• Setting Up the Network Environment for
Printing
• Managing the Printer in the Network
Environment
• Operating/Setting the Printer from the Web
Browser
User's Guide
(This Manual)
CD-ROM
Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Network Guide
CD-ROM
Remote UI Guide
CD-ROM
To view the manuals in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required. If Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed on your
system, please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
Before You Start
Chapter 2
Installing the Printer
Chapter 3
Using the Printer
Chapter 4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Chapter 5
The Printing Environment
Chapter 6
Printing Environment Settings
Chapter 7
Routine Maintenance
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Chapter 9
Installing the Optional Accessories
Chapter 10 Appendix
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Product Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
EMC Directive (220 - 240 V model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
International Energy Star-Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
WEEE Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
License Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
IPv6 Ready Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Disclaimers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images . . . . . xiv
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Chapter 1
Before You Start
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
User Manual CD-ROM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
System Configuration Requirements for Using User Manual CD-ROM . . . . . 1-4
Using the User Manual CD-ROM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Printer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Inner View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
ii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Chapter 2
Installing the Printer
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Installation Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Temperature/Humidity Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Installation Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Installation Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Required Peripheral Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Foot Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Confirming the Contents of the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site and Removing the Packing
Materials on the Outside of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Precautions on Installing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Installing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Removing the Packing Materials of the Paper Cassette and Loading Paper . . .2-23
Connecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Connecting to a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Using a LAN Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Using a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Turning the Printer ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Registering a Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Checking the Operations with Configuration Page Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Printing Configuration Page Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Contents of Configuration Page Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
When the Printer Does Not Operate Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Changing the Language Used in the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Turning the Printer OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Chapter 3
Using the Printer
Power Saving (Power Save Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Shutting Down the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Online and Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Placing the Printer Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Placing the Printer Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
iii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Direct Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Direct Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Direct Printing from the Remote UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Direct Printing from Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputting Data (Forced Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canceling a Job (Cancel Job) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) . . . . . . . . .
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Paper Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printable Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unusable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Printouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Source Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Capacity for Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Paper Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions for Handling the Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette . . . . . .
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-12
Output Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Tray Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face-down Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face-up Output Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Capacity of the Output Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching to the Face-up Output Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching to the Face-down Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions on Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Standard Size Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Custom Size Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
4-18
4-20
4-25
4-30
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
4-35
4-39
4-44
iv
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Switching Between Automatic 2-sided Printing and 1-sided Printing. . . . . . .4-48
Setting the Paper Size Switch Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Paper Loading Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Chapter 5
The Printing Environment
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Setting Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Menu Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
How to Use the Operation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
How to View the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
How to View the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Menu Functions and Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
SETUP Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Operating Procedure for the SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
UTILITY Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
UTILITY Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Operating Procedure for the UTILITY Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
JOB Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Operating Procedure for the JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
RESET Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
RESET Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Operating Procedure for the RESET Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
CANCEL JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
CANCEL JOB Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Operating Procedure for the CANCEL JOB Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
SELECT FEEDER Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Operating Procedure for the SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Initializing the SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Chapter 6
Printing Environment Settings
Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
UTILITY Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
RESET Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
v
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
SETUP Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL MENU Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEEDER MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYOUT MENU Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUALITY MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFACE MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT MODE Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER MAIN. Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCL SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFR II SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGING SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
6-11
6-14
6-20
6-24
6-27
6-36
6-37
6-40
6-45
6-45
UTILITY Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
JOB Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
RESET Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Chapter 7
Routine Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Precautions on Replacing the Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Storing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Adjusting the Print Density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Cleaning the Fixing Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Checking the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Handling the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions on Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Jam Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
8-4
8-7
8-8
Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Service Call Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
vi
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Problems with the Power or Printer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Problems with the Printout Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
Chapter 9
Installing the Optional Accessories
Installing the Paper Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Removing the Packing Materials and Installing the Paper Feeder. . . . . . . . . .9-7
Chapter 10 Appendix
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Typeface Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Scalable Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Symbol Sets Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Character Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
ISO Substitution Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31
Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33
Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34
Dimensions of Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-35
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-37
vii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon LBP3370.
Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the printer in order to familiarize
yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions.
After reading this manual, store it in a safe place for future reference.
How To Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or
injury to persons if not performed correctly.
In order to use the printer safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to
persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly.
In order to use the printer safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions.
Be sure to read these items carefully in order to operate the printer
correctly, and to avoid damage to the printer.
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure.
Reading these notes is highly recommended.
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
The following button names are a few examples of how keys and buttons to be
pressed are expressed in this manual:
• Keys
on the Control Panel: Key icon + (Key Name)
Example:
(Online)
(Utility)
• Buttons on Computer Operation Screen : [Button Name]
Example: [OK]
[Reset]
viii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Illustrations Used in This Manual
• The toner cartridge used for the illustrations in this manual is the one that can print
approximately 3,000 pages (Canon Genuine Cartridge).
• Although
the power cord used in this manual is as the one in the following
illustration, the form of the power cord may differ depending on the country or
region.
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:
Microsoft Windows 2000:
Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP:
Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003:
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Vista operating system:
Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows operating system:
Windows
ix
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Legal Notices
Product Name
Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered.
In some regions where this product is sold, the following name(s) in ( ) may be
registered instead.
LBP3370 (F151900)
EMC Directive (220 - 240 V model)
"This equipment has been tested in a typical system to comply with the technical
requirements of EMC Directive."
• Use
of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical requirements of
EMC Directive.
The product is in conformity with the EMC directive at nominal mains input 230 V,
50 Hz although the rated input of the product is 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz.
C-tick marking
on the rating label means that we declare the product is in
conformity with the relevant requirements at nominal mains input 230 V, 50 Hz
although the rated input of the product is 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Laser Safety
This product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class I laser
product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and
Safety Act of 1968. Also, this product is certified as a Class 1 laser product under
IEC60825-1:1993 and EN60825-1:1994. This means that the product does not
produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective
housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine
during any phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings or external
covers, except as directed by the equipment's manuals.
x
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The label shown below is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
International Energy Star-Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that
this product meets the ENERGY STAR Program for energy
efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an
international program that promotes energy saving through the
use of computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of
products with functions that effectively reduce energy
consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors
can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are office equipment, such as
computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The
standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
xi
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
WEEE Directive
European Union (and EEA) only.
This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of
with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive
(2002/96/EC) and your national law. This product should be
handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an
authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product
or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical
and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of
waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment
and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that
are generally associated with EEE. At the same time, your
cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to
the effective usage of natural resources. For more information
about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling,
please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved
WEEE scheme or your household waste disposal service. For
more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE
products, please visit www.canon-europe.com/environment.
(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
License Notice
This product contains UFST (Universal Font Scaling Technology) under license
from Agfa Corporation.
Copyright © 1997-2001 Agfa Monotype Corporation.
IPv6 Ready Logo
This machine has acquired IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1, as
established by the IPv6 Forum.
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, LBP, and NetSpot are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
xii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Apple, AppleTalk, Mac OS, Macintosh, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL, PCL5, and PCL6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Concerning typeface credit, the actual names on a FONTS LIST for this machine
may differ from those listed below.
CG and UFST are trademarks of Agfa Monotype Corporation or its affiliated
companies and may be registered in some jurisdictions.
Marigold is trademark of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.
Clarendon and Times are trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and its subsidiaries.
Univers is a trademark of Linotype-Hell AG and its subsidiaries and may be
registered in some jurisdictions.
Coronet is a registered trademark of Ludlow Type Foundry.
Wingdings is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Albertus, Arial and Times New Roman are trademarks of the Monotype Corporation
plc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions.
CG Omega is a product of Agfa Corporation and CG Times, based on Times New
Roman under license from the Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of Agfa
Corporation.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
Copyright
Copyright 2007 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any
information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of
Canon Inc.
xiii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Disclaimers
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS
MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON
INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the
Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and
the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your
product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A
non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be
a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan,
print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the
images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance
with your legal advisor for guidance.
•
Paper Money
•
Travelers Checks
•
Money Orders
•
Food Stamps
•
Certificates of Deposit
•
Passports
•
Postage Stamps (canceled or
uncanceled)
•
Immigration Papers
•
Identifying Badges or Insignias
•
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled
or uncanceled)
•
Selective Service or Draft Papers
•
Bonds or Other Certificates of
Indebtedness
•
Checks or Drafts Issued by
Governmental Agencies
•
Stock Certificates
•
Motor Vehicle Licenses and
Certificates of Title
•
Copyrighted Works/Works of Art
without Permission of Copyright
Owner
xiv
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Important Safety Instructions
Please read these "Important Safety Instructions" thoroughly before operating the
printer. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other
persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also,
since it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation
unless otherwise specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this
machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair
that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.
Installation
WARNING
• Do not install the printer near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances.
If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer, it
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the following items on the printer. If these items come into contact with
a high-voltage area inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If these items are dropped or slipped inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the
power switch a and disconnect the USB cable b if it is connected. Then, unplug the
power plug from the AC power outlet c and contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
xv
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids
b
c
a
a
CAUTION
• Do not install the printer in unstable locations, such as unsteady platforms or
inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the
printer to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
• Never block the ventilation slots on the printer. The ventilation slots are provided for
proper ventilation of working parts inside the printer. Never place the printer on a soft
surface, such as a sofa or rug. Blocking the ventilation slots can cause the printer to
overheat, resulting in a fire.
• Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
- A damp or dusty location
- A location exposed to smoke and steam such as cookeries and humidifiers
- A location exposed to rain or snow
- A location near water faucets or water
- A location exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location near open flames
• When installing the printer, gently lower the printer onto the floor or other machine to
avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal injury.
• When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly following the instructions in
this manual. If not connected properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical
shock.
• When moving the printer, follow the instructions in this manual to hold it correctly.
Failure to do so may cause you to drop the printer, resulting in personal injury. (See
"Moving the Printer," on p. 7-31)
xvi
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Power Supply
WARNING
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the
power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage
and result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power
cord coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical
shock.
• Do not plug the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet, as failure to do so may
result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords or plug extension cords to a multiple
power strip. If extension cords must be used or plugged to a multiple power strip,
however, use them observing the following points on user's own authority. If you use
extension cords improperly, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
- Do not connect one extension cord to another.
- Make sure that the voltage of the power plug is the one indicated in the rating label
(attached on the back of the printer) when you use the printer.
- Use an extension cord that allows the current value greater than the necessary one
indicated in the rating label (attached on the back of the printer).
- When you use an extension cord, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug
completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the
power cord and the extension cord.
- Periodically check that the extension cord is not overheated.
CAUTION
• Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Always grasp the plug when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord
may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power
cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If
objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an
emergency.
xvii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling
WARNING
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the printer. There are high-temperature and
high-voltage components inside the printer which may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly. To avoid injury, do not
allow children access to the interior of any electrical product and do not let them
touch any electrical contacts or gears that are exposed.
• If the printer makes strange noises, or emits smoke, heat or unusual smells,
immediately turn OFF the printer and computer, and disconnect the USB cable if it is
connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer. Otherwise, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the printer. If gas from these sprays comes
into contact with the electrical components inside the printer, it may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Always turn OFF the printer and computer, and disconnect the interface cables when
moving the printer. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the printer. Also, do
not spill water, liquids, or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner,
etc.) inside the printer. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area
inside the printer, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are
dropped or slipped inside the printer, immediately turn OFF the printer and computer,
and disconnect the USB cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power plug from
the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When plugging or unplugging the USB cable when the power plug is plugged in an
AC power outlet, do not touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in
electrical shock.
CAUTION
• Do not place heavy objects on the printer, as they may tip over or fall resulting in
personal injury.
• Turn OFF the power switch for safety when the printer will not be used for a long
period of time such as overnight. Also, turn OFF the power switch and unplug the
power plug for safety when the printer will not be used for an extended period of time
such as during consecutive holidays.
• Keep your hands or clothing away from the roller in the output area. Even if the
printer is not printing, sudden rotation of the roller may catch your hands or clothing,
resulting in personal injury.
xviii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• The face-up output slot and its surroundings become hot during or immediately after
using the printer. Do not touch the face-up output slot and its surroundings, as doing
so may result in burns.
• The paper may be hot immediately after being output. Be careful when removing the
paper as well as when aligning the removed paper, especially after printing
continuously. Otherwise, this may result in burns.
• The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the
printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the
laser beam cannot escape from the printer during any phase of user operation. Read
the following remarks and instructions for safety.
- Never open covers other than those instructed in this manual.
- Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit.
- If the laser beam escapes from the printer, exposure may cause serious damage to
your eyes.
xix
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance and Inspections
WARNING
• When cleaning the printer, turn OFF the printer and computer, remove the USB cable,
and then unplug the power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet regularly, and clean the area around
the base of the power plug's metal pins and the AC power outlet with a dry cloth to
ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power plug is plugged for a long
period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the
power plug and become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.
• Clean the printer using a slightly dampened cloth with water or a mild detergent
diluted with water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable
substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside
the printer, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not allow
necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the printer, as this
may result in burns or electrical shock.
• Do not throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the toner
remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
• Never attempt to service this printer yourself, except as explained in this manual.
There are no user serviceable parts inside the printer. Adjust only those controls that
are covered in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment could result in
personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered
under your Limited Warranty.
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer become hot during use. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do not touch the
fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing a toner cartridge, take care not to allow
the toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your
hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the
toner stains.
• When removing paper jammed inside the printer, remove the jammed paper gently to
prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If
the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.
• When loading paper or removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands with
the edges of the paper.
• Remove the toner cartridge carefully to prevent the toner from scattering and getting
into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
xx
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner may scatter and get into
your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately
with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to
come into contact with your skin directly. If the toner comes into contact with your
skin, wash it out with soap. If you have an irritation on your skin, or if you inhaled the
toner, immediately consult a physician.
Consumables
WARNING
• Do not throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause toner
remaining inside the cartridge to ignite and result in burns or a fire.
• Do not store a toner cartridge or copy paper in places exposed to open flames, as
this may cause the toner or paper to ignite and result in burns or a fire.
• Place the toner cartridge into a plastic bag to prevent its toner from scattering, and
then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local regulations.
CAUTION
• Keep toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If
these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner may scatter and get into
your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately
with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to
come into contact with your skin directly. If the toner comes into contact with your
skin, wash it out with soap. If you have an irritation on your skin, or if you inhaled the
toner, immediately consult a physician.
Others
WARNING
The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac
pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and
consult your physician immediately.
xxi
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
xxii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Before You Start
1
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the major features and basic functions of this printer.
Features and Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
User Manual CD-ROM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
System Configuration Requirements for Using User Manual CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Using the User Manual CD-ROM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Printer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
1-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Features and Benefits
This chapter describes the major features.
1
Before You Start
■ High-speed Printing
By mounting a newly-developed high-speed controller on the 26 ppm high-speed engine,
LBP3370 achieves super high-speed data processing. By improving the "TypeWing"
function that enables a quick start with the 0 second warm-up time (approximately 9
seconds or less from power ON) and high-speed output of the TrueType fonts, LBP3370
has increased the printing speed on fast printing and multiple page printing as well as
copy mode printing that achieves fine high-speed printing.
■ Superior Print Quality
High resolution printing at 600 dpi (dots per inch) is further enhanced by Automatic Image
Refinement to smooth jagged edges in addition to using super fine toner.
Combined, these will ensure superior reproduction quality of text and graphics.
■ Various Paper Handling Options
This printer is supplied with the 50-sheet multi-purpose tray and 250-sheet paper
cassette, enabling feeding of up to 300 sheets of paper. Also, the optional 250-sheet
paper feeder is available, enabling continuous automatic feeding of up to 550 sheets of
paper in three different sizes.
Although LBP3370 is fundamentally designed to print A4 size or smaller, you can print A3
and B4 size documents on A4 size paper by using the function to reduce the standard
paper sizes. As you can also print irregular, custom size paper, this printer supports a
wide array of uses.
■ Network Printer
Equipped with a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX print server as standard. Because LBP3370
compatible with the TCP/IP v. 4, TCP/IP v. 6, and AppleTalk protocols, you can instantly
use this printer as a network printer that supports various kinds of host/operating system
environments. Also the high-speed DMA transfer that directly transfers data to the printer
memory and automatic interface switch function enable fine printing process in a network
environment.
NOTE
For details on the operating systems that the print server equipped with this printer
support and the configuration procedures, see "Network Guide".
1-2
Features and Benefits
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Software Compatibility and Language Switching
The printer supports Hewlett-Packard's PCL 5e/PCL 6 printer languages, which enables
the printer to work with a wide variety of software applications supporting PCL. This
printer also supports UFR II. UFR II, a printing system compatible with the latest operating
systems, distributes the printing process to a computer and printer, achieving a
high-speed print output.
LBP3370 is supplied with the duplex unit. Therefore, you can automatically perform
2-sided printing with paper (A4, Legal, and Letter size) loaded in the multi-purpose tray or
paper cassette. By doing so, you can save paper and make the file space more efficient.
■ Energy Saving
The on-demand fusing technology of the printer provides improved energy efficiency.
Because of this power saving feature, the printer meets the guidelines for the International
Energy Star Program.
■ Interface Features
The printer uses a USB port that supports Microsoft Plug & Play technology. It also comes
with a print server as standard, being used as a network printer for Ethernet.
■ Typefaces
The printer comes with 45 scalable typefaces in 16 typeface families (Agfa 45 MicroType
fonts), all compatible with application software supporting Microsoft Windows. In addition,
10 bitmapped typefaces of the Line Printer family are also included. The printer uses the
Universal Font Scaling Technology (UFST) for outline fonts, provided under license from
Agfa Monotype Corporation. 31 TrueType screen fonts are also included along with Canon
Font Manager for easy management of installed fonts in Windows 2000/XP.
■ Printer Drivers and Utilities
LBP3370 is provided with the printer driver for PCL 5e/PCL 6 that supports Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista and UFR II Printer Driver that supports Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003/Vista and Mac OS X, allowing you to print from a various kinds of system
environment.
Also, NetSpot Device Installer supplied with LBP3370 simplifies the management and
settings of the printer on a network environment.
IMPORTANT
The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh. Download the
printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer from the Canon website. If you
cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer on the Canon
website, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
■ Remote UI Support
The printer supports a Remote UI function that allows you to control or monitor the status
of the printer from a computer. (See Remote UI Guide.)
Features and Benefits
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1-3
1
Before You Start
■ Duplex Unit Installed as Standard
User Manual CD-ROM Menu
The User Manual CD-ROM Menu is software that enables you to select and view
PDF Manuals included on the CD-ROM via your computer screen. Follow the
instructions below to use the User Manual CD-ROM Menu.
Before You Start
1
System Configuration Requirements for Using User
Manual CD-ROM
The User Manual CD-ROM Menu can be used in the following system
environments.
Windows
Macintosh
Operating System
Windows 2000 (Service Pack 3 or later)
Windows XP (Service Pack 1a or later)
Windows Server 2003
Windows Vista
Memory
The memory required to run the above operating systems.
Computer
A computer that can run the above operating systems.
Display
A resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels or higher.
Mac OS X
IMPORTANT
Depending on the configuration of your computer, some functions may not operate
correctly. If the PDF manual does not open from the CD-ROM Menu, open the PDF file
directly from the [english] folder on the User Manual CD-ROM.
1-4
User Manual CD-ROM Menu
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Using the User Manual CD-ROM Menu
This section describes how to use the CD-ROM Menu. When you insert the User
Manual CD-ROM provided into the CD-ROM drive, the Language Selection screen
is displayed. Clicking a language on this screen displays the following menu.
(The sample screenshot shown here is for Windows users.)
1
Before You Start
NOTE
For Macintosh users, double-click the [START] icon to start the CD-ROM Menu. The
Language Selection screen is displayed.
a
b
a BROWSE MANUAL
You can read any of the listed guides by clicking on
the desired guide. After clicking on the desired
guide, Acrobat Reader starts, and the PDF manual
is displayed.
c
b RETURN
Return to the Language Selection screen.
c EXIT
Exit the CD-ROM menu.
User Manual CD-ROM Menu
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1-5
Parts and Their Functions
This printer consists of components that perform various functions. This section
describes the name and function of each part in order for you to use this printer
properly to make full use of its functions.
Before You Start
1
Printer Unit
The following are the parts and functions of the printer unit.
CAUTION
Never block the ventilation slots on the printer. The ventilation slots are
provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the printer. Blocking the
ventilation slots can cause the printer to overheat, resulting in a fire.
Front View
The following are the parts on the front side of the printer and their functions.
NOTE
Remove the film attached to the control panel before using the panel.
g h i
j
a
b
c
k
l
m
d
a Multi-purpose Tray
Load paper when feeding the paper from the
multi-purpose tray. (See p. 4-33)
1-6
Parts and Their Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
ef
b Auxiliary Tray
Pulled out when loading paper in the multi-purpose
tray. Be sure to pull out this auxiliary tray before
loading the paper.
g Front Cover
Opened to prevent the paper from hanging out of
the multi-purpose tray when loading long-size paper,
such as A4.
d Paper Guides
Adjust the position of the paper guides to the width
of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. You
can load paper up to the load limit marks on this
tray.
Opened when replacing the toner cartridge or
removing jammed paper. (See p. 7-4)
h Face-down Output Tray
Outputs paper with the printed side facing down.
(See p. 4-13)
i Open Button
Press this button to open the front cover.
1
j Control Panel
e Paper Level Indicator
Shows the amount of paper remaining in the paper
cassette.
If the paper cassette is full, the indicator is at the top.
Because the indicator moves down as the amount of
paper drops, this gives a rough estimate of the
amount of paper remaining.
Displays the printer status and allows you to specify
the settings. (See p. 1-9)
k Ventilation Slots
Cool the insides of the printer.
l Power Switch
Turns the power of the printer ON/OFF. (See p. 2-33)
f Paper Cassette
Can be loaded with up to 250 sheets of plain paper
(of 80 g/m2). (See p. 4-17)
m Lift Handles
Hold these handles when moving the printer. (See p.
7-33)
Rear View
The following are the parts on the rear side of the printer and their functions.
a
b
i
j
k
l
m
n
c
d
e
f
g
h
a Pressure Release Levers
Press down these levers when removing jammed
paper. (See p. 8-10)
b Output Selection Cover
Open when using the face-up output slot or
removing paper jammed in the output area. (See p.
4-16)
c Power Socket
Connect the supplied power cord to this socket.
d Rating Label
The current value indicated in this rating label shows
the average power current consumption.
Parts and Their Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1-7
Before You Start
c Tray Extension
e Duplex Unit Cover
Opened when specifying the size of paper for
2-sided printing or removing paper jammed in the
duplex unit.
f Serial No. Label
Before You Start
1
The serial number (Serial No.) for printer
identification is indicated on this label. The number
is required for receiving service or repairs.
g Paper Size Switch Lever
Switch the lever according to the paper size for
2-sided printing when performing 2-sided printing.
(See p. 4-49)
h Ventilation Slots
Cool the insides of the printer.
i Face-up Output Slot
Outputs paper with the printed side facing up. (See
p. 4-14)
j 100 Indicator (Green)
Comes on when the printer is connected to a
network by 100BASE-TX.
k 10 Indicator (Green)
Comes on when the printer is connected to a
network by 10BASE-T.
l TX/RX Indicator (Green)
Blinks while the print server is communicating.
m LAN Connector
Connects to a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX LAN cable.
n USB Connector
Connected to the USB cable. Connect the other end
of the cable to the USB port on the computer.
Inner View
The following are the parts inside the printer and their functions.
a
b
a Toner Cartridge Guide
When setting the toner cartridge, push it while
aligning the projections on each side of the toner
cartridge with this guide. (See p. 7-13)
1-8
Parts and Their Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b Transport Guide
Raised when removing paper jammed in the front
cover. (See p. 8-13)
Control Panel
The control panel on the top of the printer allows you to check the printer status and
use the printer functions.
a
1
b
c
d
e
j
k
l
f
m
n
Before You Start
g
h
i
IMPORTANT
Depending on the settings, the printer may operate differently from the description of the
following "On menu operation". For more details, see the instructions for each setting.
a Display
d
Displays the printer status, messages, the items and
setting values of the menu functions. (See p. 1-11)
b
Ready Indicator (Green)
On:
The printer is ready to print. (If the printer has
entered Power Save Mode 1 when it is online, only
the
(Ready) indicator (green) and Power
indicator (green) are on.)
Blinking:
The printer is performing a self-diagnostic test. The
printer is in a warm-up state.
Off:
The printer cannot print.
c
Utility (
) Key
On offline:
Does not function when the printer is offline.
On online:
Displays the UTILITY menu.
On menu operation:
Displays the next left item in the menu. Decreases
the setting value.
Reset (
) Key
On offline:
Displays the RESET menu.
On online:
Displays the RESET menu.
On menu operation:
Goes to the next menu (Goes down the hierarchy).
In a lowest menu level (When a setting value is
displayed), determines the setting value.
e
Paper Source Indicators (Green)
On:
The indicator for the currently selected paper source
comes on.
Blinking:
There is no paper in the currently selected paper
source, or the paper cassette is not set.
Off:
No paper source is selected. No paper cassette
including the optional one or paper feeder is set.
f Power Indicator (Green)
On:
The printer is ON.
Off:
The printer is OFF.
Parts and Their Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1-9
g
Job Indicator (Green)
On:
The printer is receiving print data, or any print data
remains in the printer memory.
Blinking:
The printer is processing print data.
Off:
There is no print data in the printer memory.
h
i
Job (
) Key
On offline:
Does not function when the printer is offline.
On online:
Displays the JOB menu.
On menu operation:
Goes back to the previous menu (Goes back up the
hierarchy).
j
Settings (
) Key
On offline:
Displays the SETUP menu.
On online:
Displays the SETUP menu. However, the USER
MAIN. options cannot be specified when the printer
is online.
On menu operation:
Displays the next right item in the menu. Increases
the setting value.
k [OK] Key
On offline:
Does not function when the printer is offline.
On online:
Does not function when the printer is online.
On menu operation:
Goes to the next menu (Goes down the hierarchy).
In a lowest menu level (When a setting value is
displayed), determines the setting value.
1-10
Parts and Their Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Feeder Selection Key
On offline:
Displays the SELECT FEEDER menu.
On online:
Displays the SELECT FEEDER menu.
On menu operation:
Does not function.
m
Message Indicator (Orange)
On:
The printer cannot print because a problem has
occurred in the printer. (If the printer has entered
Power Save Mode 1 when it is offline, only the
(Message) indicator (orange) and Power indicator
(green) are on.)
Off:
The printer is in a normal state.
Before You Start
1
l
Cancel Job Key
On offline:
Cancels the job when the
(Job) indicator is on or
blinking. Does not function when the
(Job)
indicator is off.
On online:
Cancels the job when the
(Job) indicator is on or
blinking. Does not function when the
(Job)
indicator is off.
n
Online Key/Online Indicator (Green)
Turns on (online)/off (offline) the connection to the
computer.
This key also has the function that, when an error
has occurred, releases the printer from the error
temporarily and continues the paused job. However,
depending on the error, you may not be able to
cancel it out.
The
(Online) indicator under the
(Online)
key indicates the following printer status with its
status.
On:
Online (The printer can receive print data from the
computer.)
Off:
Offline (The printer cannot receive print data from
the computer.)
However, if the printer has entered Power Save
Mode, the
(Online) indicator is off even when
the printer is online. (See p. 3-6)
Display
The display on the printer's control panel is as shown in the following. It displays the
printer status, messages, items and settings of the menu functions.
a
00 READY
A4
a Status/Operation Field
Displays the printer status and print mode.
b
When operating the printer
using the control panel
CONTROL MENU
b Paper Source/Paper Size Field
Displays the size of paper in the currently selected
paper source using an abbreviation. The names of
the following paper sizes are indicated by an
abbreviation. (Legal: LG, Letter: LT, Executive: EX,
Statement: ST, Envelope DL: DL, Envelope COM10:
CO, Envelope C5: EC5, Envelope Monarch: MO,
Envelope B5: EB5, Index Card: IC, Custom Size: 80
to 99, Custom SizeR: 80R to 99R, Free/Mixed Sizes:
FR)
Parts and Their Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
→
1-11
Before You Start
When the printer is ready to print
Optional Accessories
The following optional accessories are available in order to make full use of the
printer functions. Purchase them to fulfill your needs. For the optional accessories,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Before You Start
1
Paper Feeder
In addition to the supplied multi-purpose tray and paper cassette, up to three paper
sources can be used by installing the optional paper feeder.
The paper feeder can be loaded with up to approximately 250 sheets of plain paper
(80 g/m2) of A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, and the following custom paper
sizes.
• When
loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Length
210.0 to 355.6 mm
• When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): Width 210.0 to 215.9 mm; Length 210.0 to 215.9 mm
PAPER FEEDER PF-35P
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to use a paper feeder designed for this printer.
• For details on the procedure for installing the paper feeder, see "Installing the Paper
Feeder," on p. 9-2.
1-12
Optional Accessories
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing the Printer
2
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the procedure from taking this printer out of the package to installing
the printer.
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Confirming the Contents of the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site and Removing the Packing Materials on the Outside of the Printer . . . 2-10
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge . 2-14
Precautions on Installing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Installing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Removing the Packing Materials of the Paper Cassette and Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Connecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Connecting to a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Turning the Printer ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Registering a Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Checking the Operations with Configuration Page Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
When the Printer Does Not Operate Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Changing the Language Used in the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Turning the Printer OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
2-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installation Procedure
According to your installation condition, perform the relevant procedure. When you
do not install the optional accessories, skip the procedures indicated with
(Optional).
Installing the Printer
2
2-2
1
Installing the Paper Feeder (See p. 9-2)
2
Installing the Printer (See p. 2-10)
3
Installing the Toner Cartridge (See p. 2-14)
4
Loading Paper (See p. 2-23)
5
Connecting the Power Cord (See p. 2-26)
6
Connecting the Printer to a Computer (See p. 2-28)
Installation Procedure
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
(Optional)
Installation Site
IMPORTANT
Before installing the printer, be sure to read "Important Safety Instructions" (See p. xv).
Installation Environment
Select an installation site for this printer in view of the following environmental
conditions.
Temperature/Humidity Conditions
Use the printer in a location where the temperature and humidity are in the
following ranges.
• Ambient
• Ambient
temperature: 10 to 32.5 °C (50 to 90.5 °F)
humidity: 20 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
IMPORTANT
• Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the printer under the following
circumstances. Leave the printer for two hours or more to adjust to the surrounding
temperature and humidity before using it.
- When the room where the printer is installed is heated rapidly
- When the printer is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location
• If water droplets form inside the printer, the paper transport path will not function
properly, and this may result in paper jams, damage to the printer, or printer error.
■ To customers using an ultrasonic humidifier
If you use an ultrasonic humidifier in conjunction with tap water or well water, impurities in
the water will be dispersed through the air. These can be trapped inside the printer,
causing degradations in printing quality. When you are using these humidifiers, it is
therefore recommended that you use purified water or other water that is free of
impurities.
Installation Site
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-3
2
Installing the Printer
In order to use this printer in a safe and comfortable manner, install the printer in a
place that fulfills "Temperature/Humidity Conditions", "Power Supply
Requirements", and "Installation Requirements" described in "Installation
Environment".
Power Supply Requirements
The maximum power consumption of this printer is 950 W or less.
Before connecting the printer to the power supply, make sure that the power supply
is safe and its voltage is stable.
Use power supplies rated for voltages in the following ranges.
• 220
to 240 V (± 10 %) 50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
IMPORTANT
• An AC power outlet should be used exclusively for the printer. Any other sockets of the
AC power outlet should not be used.
• Do not plug the power plug into the auxiliary outlet on a computer.
• Do not plug the power plug of the printer and that of machinery which consumes a large
amount of electricity or generates electrical noise, such as a copy machine, air
conditioner, or shredder, into the same AC power outlet.
Installing the Printer
2
Installation Requirements
Install the printer in the following locations.
•A
location where sufficient space can be secured
• A well-ventilated room
• A flat, even surface
• A sturdy platform that can easily support the weight of the printer and optional
accessories
WARNING
Do not install the printer near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable
substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts
inside the printer, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
- A damp or dusty location
- A location exposed to smoke and steam such as cookeries and humidifiers
- A location exposed to rain or snow
- A location near water faucets or water
- A location exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location near open flames
• Do not install the printer in unstable locations, such as unsteady platforms or
inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may
cause the printer to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
2-4
Installation Site
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installation Space
Select an installation location where you can secure the following amounts of free
space around the printer, and a surface that can support the weight of the printer.
The dimensions of the space required around the components and the positions of
the feet are as follows.
Required Peripheral Space
■ Standard state
Front Surface
200
100
Front cover
Paper cassette
100
100
467
500
599.7
(mm)
1072.9
Output selection cover
Installation Site
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-5
2
Installing the Printer
IMPORTANT
Do not install the printer in the following locations, as this may result in damage to the
printer.
- An environment where the temperature and/or humidity can change dramatically, or
where condensation occurs
- A poorly ventilated room (Ozone is generated by the printer in use, however, the
amount is too small to be harmful to the human body. However, if you are going to use
the printer for a long time in a poorly ventilated room or to perform a large amount of
printing, ventilate the room to keep the working environment comfortable.)
- A location near products that generate magnetic waves or electromagnetic waves
- In rooms such as laboratories where chemical reactions occur
- A place where salt content, corrosive gases such as ammonia, or toxic gases are
contained
- A platform that may warp from the weight of the printer and optional accessories, or the
printer is liable to sink (such as a carpet or mat)
■ State with the paper feeder installed
Front Surface
(mm)
500
Paper cassette
556
599.7
Front cover
100
Installing the Printer
100
2
200
100
1072.9
Output selection cover
Foot Positions
■ Printer unit
(mm)
294.2
40.5
43.9
294.2
40.5
277.6
52.7
54.2
54.3
43.9
283.2
62.3
Front Surface
NOTE
The front feet are 7.8 mm high and their top surface is 12 mm square.
The rear feet are 7.8 mm high, the left top surface has a rectangular shape of 21.7 mm x
40 mm, and the right top surface is 18.6 mm x 40 mm and is L-shaped.
2-6
Installation Site
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ PAPER FEEDER PF-35P
(mm)
Front Surface
61.9
54.6
26.7
305.8
28.5
NOTE
The front feet are 7.8 mm high and their top surface is 12 mm square.
The rear feet are 7.8 mm high, the left top surface has a rectangular shape of 21.7 mm x
40 mm, and the right top surface is 31.7 mm x 40 mm and is L-shaped.
Installation Site
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-7
Installing the Printer
2
61.8
276
40.3
62.7
294
282.4
26.7
Confirming the Contents of the Box
Make sure that all the following items are contained in the package before installing
the printer. If any item is missing or damaged, please contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
Installing the Printer
2
Printer
The following parts are
already installed.
-Paper cassette
-Toner cartridge
Power cord
(The form of the
supplied power cord
may differ from the
one in the above
illustration.)
Printer Driver Software CD-ROM
• Printer Driver
• Driver Guide
Ferrite core
User Manual CD-ROM
• Manuals
- User's Guide
- Remote UI Guide
- Network Guide
• Canon Font Manager
IMPORTANT
The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh. Download the
printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer from the Canon website. If you
cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer on the Canon
website, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
2-8
Confirming the Contents of the Box
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE
• The life of the toner cartridge included with the printer is approximately 3,000 pages on
the basis of "ISO/IEC 19752"* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density
setting.
* "ISO/IEC 19752" is the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for
monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that may contain printer
components" issued by ISO (International Organization for Standardization)
• The following two types of replacement toner cartridges with different lifetimes are
• Canon Font Manager is included in the [Canonfm] folder on the User Manual CD-ROM.
Confirming the Contents of the Box
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-9
2
Installing the Printer
available.
- The one with the same lifetime as that of the included toner cartridge
- The one with a longer lifetime than that of the included toner cartridge
For details on the replacement toner cartridges, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on
p. 7-2.
• This printer does not come with a USB cable. Have an appropriate one available for the
computer you are using. Use a USB cable with the following symbol.
Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site and
Removing the Packing Materials on the Outside of the
Printer
After securing the installation site, carry the printer to the installation site and
remove the packing materials on the outside of the printer. When carrying the
printer, carry it after pulling out the paper cassette.
2
Installing the Printer
IMPORTANT
• When installing the optional paper feeder, install it at the installation site before carrying
the printer to the installation site. For details on installing the paper feeder, see "Installing
the Paper Feeder," on p. 9-2.
• Secure sufficient space around the printer at the installation site so that you can install
the optional accessories and connect cables.
• The removed packing materials are required when transporting the printer for relocation
or maintenance. Keep them where they will not get lost.
NOTE
The packing materials may be changed in form or position to be placed, or may be added
or removed without notice.
2-10
Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site and Removing the Packing Materials on the Outside of the
DownloadedPrinter
from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
Carry the printer unit to the installation site.
From the front side, securely hold the printer by the lift handles located on the
lower portion of the printer with both hands.
Installing the Printer
2
CAUTION
• This printer weighs approximately 12.2 kg. Please be careful not to hurt
your back or other portions of your body when carrying the printer.
Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site and Removing the Packing Materials on the Outside of the
Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-11
• Be sure not to hold the printer by the front portion, back portion, or any
portions other than the lift handles. If you do so, you may drop the printer,
resulting in personal injury.
Installing the Printer
2
• The back portion (A) of the printer is relatively heavy. Be careful not to get
off-balanced when lifting the printer. If you do so, you may drop the printer,
resulting in personal injury.
(A)
2-12
Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site and Removing the Packing Materials on the Outside of the
DownloadedPrinter
from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2
Put the printer down carefully at the installation site.
CAUTION
Put the printer down slowly and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your
hands.
3
Remove the tape attached to the printer (2 locations).
Installing the Printer
2
Carrying the Printer to the Installation Site and Removing the Packing Materials on the Outside of the
Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-13
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and
Installing the Toner Cartridge
The toner cartridge protected with packing materials is already installed in the
printer.
Be sure to take the toner cartridge out of the printer once, and then remove the
packing materials using the following procedure.
Installing the Printer
2
Precautions on Installing the Toner Cartridge
CAUTION
Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
IMPORTANT
Dispose of the packing materials according to local regulations.
NOTE
• For details on handling toner cartridges, see "Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges,"
on p. 7-14.
• The packing materials may be changed in form or position to be placed, or may be added
or removed without notice.
2-14
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing the Toner Cartridge
1
Open the front cover.
While pressing the open button on the top of the front cover a, open it gently b.
2
Installing the Printer
a
b
2
Turn over the paper toward you.
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-15
IMPORTANT
Do not remove the paper alone with the toner cartridge and packing materials
installed in the printer.
Installing the Printer
2
3
2-16
Remove the packing material.
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4
Remove the toner cartridge from the printer.
IMPORTANT
Be sure not to touch the high-voltage contacts (A) or electrical contact (B) shown in
the figure, as this may result in damage to the printer.
(B)
(A)
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-17
Installing the Printer
2
5
Hold the toner cartridge as shown in the figure, and shake it
gently 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside the
cartridge.
Installing the Printer
2
IMPORTANT
• If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in deterioration in print quality. Be
sure to carry out this procedure properly.
• Be sure to shake the toner cartridge gently. If you do not shake the cartridge gently,
toner may spill out.
6
Remove the packing material shown in the figure.
Raise the tab of the packing material (A), then remove it.
(A)
2-18
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7
Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface.
8
Pull out the sealing tape.
While holding the toner cartridge steady a, hook your fingers into the tab and
fold it back.
Pull out the sealing tape (approx. 45 cm long) straight in the direction of the
arrow gently b.
Installing the Printer
2
b
a
CAUTION
If the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully or stopped at midpoint, toner
may spill out. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
IMPORTANT
• Do not pull the sealing tape diagonally, upwards, or downwards. If the tape is
severed, it may become difficult to pull out completely.
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-19
• Pull out the sealing tape completely from the toner cartridge. If any tape remains in
the toner cartridge, this may result in poor print quality.
• When pulling out the sealing tape, be careful not to touch the toner cartridge
memory (A) or hold the drum protective shutter (B) with your hands.
(A)
Installing the Printer
2
(B)
9
2-20
Remove the packing material with paper inside the front
cover.
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10 Hold the toner cartridge properly with the arrowed side facing
up as shown in the figure.
Installing the Printer
2
11 Install the toner cartridge.
Push the toner cartridge into the printer firmly until it touches the back of the
printer while aligning (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge with the toner
cartridge guides inside the printer.
Side View (Right)
Side View (Left)
(A)
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-21
12 Close the front cover.
Close the front cover gently and firmly.
Installing the Printer
2
IMPORTANT
• If you cannot close the front cover, make sure that the toner cartridge is installed
properly. If you try to close the front cover forcefully, this may result in damage to
the printer or toner cartridge.
• Do not leave the front cover open for a long time after installing the toner cartridge.
This may result in deterioration in print quality.
2-22
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Printer and Installing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Removing the Packing Materials of the Paper Cassette
and Loading Paper
NOTE
The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or
removed without notice.
1
Pull out the paper cassette.
Removing the Packing Materials of the Paper Cassette and Loading Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-23
2
Installing the Printer
IMPORTANT
• For details on handling the paper cassette, see "Precautions for Handling the
Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette," on p. 4-12.
• The removed packing materials are required when transporting the printer for relocation
or maintenance. Be sure not to misplace them.
2
Remove the tape that is securing the packing material in the
paper cassette (2 locations).
Installing the Printer
2
3
Remove the packing material in the paper cassette.
4
Load paper in the paper cassette.
For details on the procedure for loading paper in the paper cassette, see
"Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 4-17.
NOTE
If you want to load paper in the multi-purpose tray, load the paper after Step 5.
For details on the procedure for loading paper in the multi-purpose tray, see
"Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 4-33.
2-24
Removing the Packing Materials of the Paper Cassette and Loading Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5
Set the paper cassette in the printer.
Push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper
cassette is flush with the front surface of the printer.
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette in the printer, be careful not to catch your
fingers.
This printer's paper cassette cannot automatically detect the paper size. Therefore, you
need to register the size of the loaded paper.
See "Registering a Paper Size" (p. 2-34) to register the paper size after turning the
printer ON.
Removing the Packing Materials of the Paper Cassette and Loading Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-25
Installing the Printer
2
Connecting the Cables
Connecting the Power Cord
This section describes the procedure for connecting the power cord. When
connecting the power cord, see "Important Safety Instructions," on p. xv.
Installing the Printer
2
IMPORTANT
• One AC power outlet should be used exclusively for the printer.
• Do not plug the power plug into the auxiliary outlet on a computer.
• Do not connect this printer to an uninterruptible power source. This may cause printer
malfunction or breakdown at the occurrence of a power failure.
1
Make sure that the power switch of the printer is OFF.
The printer is OFF when "
2-26
Connecting the Cables
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
" of the power switch is pressed.
2
Plug the supplied power cord into the power socket.
3
Installing the Printer
2
Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.
NOTE
The form of the supplied power cord may differ from the one in the above
illustration.
Connecting the Cables
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-27
Connecting to a Computer
This section describes how to connect the printer to a computer and network.
This printer is equipped with a LAN connector and USB connector.
Using a LAN Cable
By connecting the printer to a network such as Ethernet to be shared on the
network, you can use the printer from a computer on the network. You can use
UNIX, Windows, Mac OS, and other operating systems.
Installing the Printer
2
This printer includes a print server that supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX and is
compatible with the TCP/IP, AppleTalk (EtherTalk), and SMB protocols.
Connect the LAN connector on this printer and a hub port with a Category 5 twisted
pair cable. Have cables or a hub ready as needed. For compatible cables and hubs,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Computer with
100BASE-TX Connector
Computer with
10BASE-T Connector
Ethernet Cable
LAN Connector
Hub
CAUTION
Before connecting the network cable to the printer, be sure to turn the printer
OFF, and then unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to
observe these steps may result in an electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
If more than one devices are connected to an AppleTalk network, turn on each device at
an interval of ten seconds or longer.
NOTE
• This printer recognizes the type of Ethernet (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T) automatically.
• If both 100BASE-TX devices and 10BASE-T devices are on the same network, a device
such as a switching hub that supports both 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T is required. For
more details, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• If you connected this printer to a network, check the MAC address of the print server with
Configuration Page Print, and then configure the network operating system (UNIX, etc.)
and print server. For more details, see "Network Guide".
2-28
Connecting the Cables
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
Attach the ferrite core to the LAN cable as shown in the figure.
Attach the ferrite core at 5 cm or less from the end of the connector (A)
connected to the printer.
Installing the Printer
2
(A)
5 cm or less
NOTE
A ferrite core is supplied with the printer.
2
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector of the printer.
Connect a LAN cable that is compatible with the LAN connector of the network
board according to the network.
Connecting the Cables
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-29
3
Connect the other end of the LAN cable to the hub.
Installing the Printer
2
● Installing the Software
After connecting the LAN cable, install the software for this printer. For more
details, see "Driver Guide".
IMPORTANT
The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh. Download
the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer from the Canon website. If
you cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer on the
Canon website, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Using a USB Cable
Connect the printer to a computer equipped with a USB port using a USB cable.
WARNING
When plugging or unplugging the USB cable when the power plug is plugged in
an AC power outlet, do not touch the metal part of the connector, as this may
result in electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
• Do not plug or unplug the USB cable while the computer and printer are ON, as this may
result in damage to the printer.
• This printer uses bi-directional communication. Operation of the printer when connected
via unidirectional communication equipment has not been tested, and as a result, Canon
cannot guarantee printer operation when the printer is connected using unidirectional
print servers, USB hubs or switching devices.
2-30
Connecting the Cables
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
2
Make sure that the printer and computer are OFF.
Connect the B-type (square) end of the USB cable to the USB
connector on the rear side of the printer.
Connecting the Cables
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-31
2
Installing the Printer
NOTE
• The appropriate USB interface varies depending on the operating system of the
connected computer as follows. For more details, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
- Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB1.1
equivalent)
- Mac OS X 10.3.2 or earlier: USB Full-Speed (USB 1.1 equivalent)
- Mac OS X 10.3.3 or later: USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB1.1 equivalent)
• When you connect this printer to a computer with a USB cable, use a computer with
manufacturer's guarantee of USB proper operation.
• This printer does not come with a USB cable. Have an appropriate one available for the
computer you are using. Use a USB cable with the following symbol.
3
Connect the A-type (flat) end of the USB cable to the USB port
on the computer.
Installing the Printer
2
NOTE
If you are not sure about the USB cable that is supported by the computer you are
using, contact the store where you purchased the computer.
● Installing the Software
After connecting the USB cable, install the software for this printer. For more
details, see "Driver Guide".
IMPORTANT
The supplied CD-ROM does not include the printer driver for Macintosh. Download
the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer from the Canon website. If
you cannot find the printer driver for Macintosh that supports this printer on the
Canon website, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
2-32
Connecting the Cables
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer
Operation
This section describes the procedures for turning the printer ON and checking the
printer operation.
IMPORTANT
• Do not turn the power ON immediately after turning it OFF. If you want to turn the printer
ON again after turning it OFF, wait at least 10 seconds after turning the printer OFF
before turning it ON again.
• If the printer does not operate properly or an error message appears, see "When the
Printer Does Not Operate Properly," on p. 2-37.
• Be sure to set the paper cassette in the printer before you turn the power ON for the first
time after you install the printer.
• Although a sheet of blank paper is output when you turn the power ON for the first time
after you install the printer, this is not an error.
1
Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON.
The indicators and display on the control panel come on, and the printer initiates
a self-diagnostic test on the printer unit and optional accessories.
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-33
Installing the Printer
2
Turning the Printer ON
If no abnormality is found during the self-diagnostic test, the
(Online)
indicator,
(Ready) indicator and
(Paper Source) indicator for the currently
selected paper source come on, <00 READY> appears in the display, and the
printer is ready to print.
(Ready) Indicator
2
Installing the Printer
(Paper Source) Indicator
(Online) Indicator
The following information is displayed in the display.
Printable and not
processing print data
00
READY
A4
Size of paper in the
currently selected
paper source
Registering a Paper Size
This printer's paper cassette cannot automatically detect the paper size. Therefore,
in CASSETTE(n) SIZE (n = 1, 2) in the FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP
menu, you need to register the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette.
When paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray, you need to register the size of the
loaded paper in TRAY PAPER SIZE in the FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP
menu.
For more details on the procedure for registering a paper size, see the following
directions.
• When
registering the size of the paper in the paper cassette
See "Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 4-30
• When registering the size of the paper in the multi-purpose tray
See "Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 4-44
When printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which the printer
driver cannot be used, also set STD PAPER SIZE (See p. 6-16) in the FEEDER
MENU options in the SETUP menu to the size of the loaded paper.
2-34
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Checking the Operations with Configuration Page Print
Before using the printer for the first time, be sure to perform Configuration Page
Print to check the operations using the following procedure. Configuration Page
Print prints printer information such as a list of the setting values and the number of
the total print pages.
Printing Configuration Page Print
Configuration Page Print can be printed using the following procedure.
1
Press " " of the power switch to turn the printer ON.
2
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press the
3
Press the
(Online) key.
(Utility) key.
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
→
CONFIG.PAGE is displayed in the display.
4
Press [OK].
CONFIG.PAGE
→
EXECUTING
(Approx. 1 sec.)
CONFIG.PAGE
→
Configuration Page Print is printed.
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-35
2
Installing the Printer
NOTE
• Configuration Page Print is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Load a sheet of A4
size paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
• The settings specified by the menu of the printer's control panel are reflected to
Configuration Page Print. For example, when the automatic 2-sided printing function is
specified, Configuration Page Print will be printed with two pages on both sides of paper.
However, always a sheet of paper is printed regardless of the number of copies.
Contents of Configuration Page Print
Configuration Page Print prints information as shown in the following figure.
Configuration Page Print allows you to confirm information such as a list of the
setting values specified in the printer function menu, the versions of the software
and hardware installed on the printer, and the number of the total print pages. You
can check the number of the total print pages using "Page Count" on the lower right
of Configuration Page Print.
IMPORTANT
This is a sample of Configuration Page Print. The contents may partially differ from the
Configuration Page Print printed by your printer.
Installing the Printer
2
2-36
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When the Printer Does Not Operate Properly
If the printer does not operate even after turnig it ON or print Configuration Page
Print properly, the following causes are conceivable.
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
The power plug is unplugged from Plug the power plug into the AC
the AC power outlet.
power outlet.
There is a break in the power
cord.
The printer is not turned ON.
The indicators on
the control panel do The printer is in Power Save
not come on.
Mode.
The printer does
not operate.
Turn the printer ON.
The printer will be ready to print
after you send print data or press
any key on the control panel.
The printer is offline.
Press the
(Online) key to turn
on the
(Online) indicator.
The interface cable is
disconnected.
Connect the interface cable firmly
to the interface connectors on the
computer and printer unit.
The amount of the paper loaded
in the paper cassette or
multi-purpose tray exceeds the
load limitation.
Reduce the amount of paper to
within the load limitation and print
again.
Paper is not loaded properly in
A paper jam occurs the paper cassette or
each time you print. multi-purpose tray.
Unusable paper is loaded in the
paper cassette or multi-purpose
tray.
Load the paper properly and print
again.
Replace the paper with one that
can be used and print again.
There is still jammed paper inside Remove any jammed paper and
the printer.
print again.
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-37
2
Installing the Printer
The printer cannot
be turned ON.
If the printer is turned ON after
replacing the power cord with the
one that is of the same type and
is used for other device, there is a
break in the power cord. In this
case, purchase a new power cord
and replace it with the broken
one.
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
Align the paper stack in the paper
Multiple sheets of paper were fed
cassette properly and load it
at a time.
again.
Nothing is printed
on the paper.
The
(Message)
indicator is on and
a message is
displayed in the
display.
Installing the Printer
2
The toner cartridge was installed
with the sealing tape still
attached.
Take the toner cartridge out of the
printer, pull out the sealing tape,
and then reinstall the toner
cartridge.
Some problem has occurred.
See "Message List" (p. 8-26) and
solve the problem.
Changing the Language Used in the Display
The default value of the language used in the display is [ENGLISH].
You can change the display language to FRENCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, or
SPANISH using the following procedure.
1
Press the
(Settings) key.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
2
→
Select CONTROL MENU using [
CONTROL MENU
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
POWER SAVE MODE→
3
Select PANEL LANGUAGE using [
[OK].
PANEL LANGUAGE →
=ENGLISH
2-38
→
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
] and [
], then press
4
Select the display language using [
[OK].
FRENCH
→
=FRENCH
→
] and [
], then press
The display language is changed.
PANNEAU LANGUES→
Turning the Printer OFF
Turn the printer OFF using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• If the printer is connected to a network, make sure that other computers are not sending
print data to the printer before turning the printer OFF.
• If you turn the printer OFF when the
(Job) indicator is on, all the print data remaining
in the printer memory will be erased. If there is any necessary print data remaining in the
printer, wait until it is output, or press the
(Reset) key in the offline state and then
select FORM FEED to output the data before turning the printer OFF.
• Do not turn the power OFF when the printer is in any of the following status:
- During printing
- While the printer is running a self-diagnostic test immediately after turning the power
ON
- While a message informing you that the NVRAM is being initialized or being written is
displayed
- While the message <02 WARMING UP> is displayed
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-39
Installing the Printer
2
1
Make sure that the
(Job) indicator is off.
OFF
Installing the Printer
2
2
Press "
" of the power switch on the printer.
It is recommended that you shut down the printer before turning it OFF. (See
"Shutting Down the Printer," on p. 3-4)
If you are using WSD, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is
turned OFF.
2-40
Turning the Printer ON and Checking the Printer Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Using the Printer
3
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the basic functions of this printer.
Power Saving (Power Save Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Shutting Down the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Online and Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Placing the Printer Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Placing the Printer Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Direct Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Direct Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Direct Printing from the Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Direct Printing from Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Outputting Data (Forced Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Canceling a Job (Cancel Job) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
3-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Power Saving (Power Save Mode)
You can reduce power consumption efficiently by using Power Save Mode when the
printer is idle or not in use.
There are the following two kinds of Power Save Mode.
NOTE
• To configure the printer so that it does not enter Power Save Mode, set POWER SAVE
MODE (See p. 6-11) to OFF.
• To contigure the printer so that it dose not enter Power Save Mode when an error is
occurring in the printer (when the
(Message) indicator is on, or the number in the
message blinks), set PWR SAVE IN ERR (See p. 6-12) to OFF.
Using the Printer
3
■ Power Save Mode 1 (Panel Off Mode) ... Power-saving effect: Small
The printer enters Power Save Mode 1 when it is in the following condition.
Condition
POWER SAVE MODE is set to DEEP SLEEP or PANEL OFF.
The panel operation has not been performed and no data has been sent from the
computer for the time specified in POWER SAVE TIME (See p. 6-12).
(You can select 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, or 180 minutes for
POWER SAVE TIME, and the default value is 15 minutes.)
NOTE
• When the printer enters Power Save Mode 1, only the
(Ready) indicator and Power
indicator come on. However, when the printer is offline, only the
(Message) indicator
and Power indicator come on.
• Power Save Mode 1 can be released when the printer is in any of the following status:
- When any key on the control panel is pressed
- When an error is occurring
- When the printer receives data from the computer (Only when the printer is online)
- When the settings for [Utility Menu] are specified in the Remote UI
- When the settings for [Device Control] are specified in the Remote UI
3-2
Power Saving (Power Save Mode)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Power Save Mode 2 (Deep Sleep Mode) ... Power-saving effect: Large
The printer enters Power Save Mode 2 when it is in the following condition.
Condition
POWER SAVE MODE is set to DEEP SLEEP.
The printer has already entered Power Save Mode 1.
USB in I/F CONNECTION is set to OFF.
APPLETALK in NETWORK MENU is set to OFF.
SMB SERVER in NETWORK MENU is set to OFF*.
The printer has not communicated on the network for more than 15 seconds.
* Even when SMB SERVER is set to ON, the printer enters Power Save Mode 2 if the "server name" for SMB is not
entered.
IMPORTANT
Even if POWER SAVE MODE is set to PANEL OFF or OFF, the printer enters Power
Save Mode 2 when [Deep Sleep] is executed in [Device Control] in the Remote UI.
NOTE
• When the printer enters Power Save Mode 2, only the Power indicator comes on.
• Power Save Mode 2 can be released when the printer is in any of the following status:
- When the
(Online) key on the control panel is pressed
- When the printer receives data from the computer (Only when the printer is online)
- The settings for [Utility Menu] are specified in the Remote UI
• The printer does not enter Power Save Mode 2 in the state where a DHCP
communication can be done.
Power Saving (Power Save Mode)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3-3
Using the Printer
3
There is no job on the print queue.
Shutting Down the Printer
It is recommended that you shut down the printer using the following procedure
when you want to turn the printer OFF.
NOTE
If you are using WSD, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is turned OFF.
3
Using the Printer
1
Press the
(Reset) key.
RESET
SOFT RESET
2
→
Display SHUT DOWN using [
SHUT DOWN
→
OK?
3
Press [OK].
OK?
EXECUTING
02 SHUTTING DOWN
TURN OFF POWER
3-4
Shutting Down the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
] and [
], then press [OK].
4
When the message <TURN OFF POWER> appears, press "
of the power switch.
"
Using the Printer
3
Shutting Down the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3-5
Online and Offline
When the printer can receive data from the computer and print the data, the printer
is in the state of "Online", and when the printer is disconnected with the computer
and cannot receive data, the printer is in the state of "Offline".
To perform the settings for each menu using the control panel, switch the printer
status as follows:
3
O: The status that you can enter the menu
Using the Printer
-: The status that you cannot enter the menu
When the printer is
online
SETUP Menu
When the printer is
offline
*
SELECT FEEDER Menu
RESET Menu
JOB Menu
-
UTILITY Menu
-
* The USER MAIN. options cannot be specified when the printer is online.
Placing the Printer Online
When printing from the computer, the printer has to be online. Before printing, make
sure that the printer is online. If not, place the printer online using the following
procedure. The printer comes online automatically after you turn it ON.
1
Press the
The
(Online) key.
(Online) indicator comes on, and the printer is ready to print.
IMPORTANT
When an error is occurring in the printer (when the
(Message) indicator is on,
or the number in the message blinks), the printer does not come online. Eliminate
the cause of the error before you place the printer online.
3-6
Online and Offline
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE
If the printer has entered Power Save Mode 1, the
(Online) indicator is off even
when the printer is online, and only the
(Ready) indicator and Power indicator
are on. If the printer has entered Power Save Mode 2, only the Power indicator is
on. If the printer receives data while it is in Power Save Mode, the mode is
released, the
(Online) indicator comes on, and the printer is ready to print.
Placing the Printer Offline
To configure the printer so that it does not receive data from the computer or
specify the settings for all the items in the SETUP menu, place the printer offline
using the following procedure.
1
Press the
(Online) key.
The
(Online) indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the
control panel.
IMPORTANT
This printer comes online automatically if left in the offline state for five minutes or
longer. However, when an error is occurring in the printer (when the
(Message)
indicator is on, or the number in the message blinks), or while you are performing
any setting, such as selecting the menu functions or a paper source, or when
specifying the paper size, the printer does not come online.
Online and Offline
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3-7
Using the Printer
3
Direct Print
Direct Print
The direct print function is a function that transmits a file from the host terminal to
the printer without the printer driver and allows the printer to detect the file and
print. Therefore, you do not need to open a file to print.
3
Using the Printer
To perform printing, from the Remote UI, specify the image file in TIFF/JPEG format
that you want to print.
This printer also supports direct printing by command entry from Command Prompt
(the LPR command).
■ Printing from the Remote UI (See p. 3-9)
■ Printing from Command Prompt (See p. 3-14)
IMPORTANT
Note the following when printing image files using the direct print function.
- JPEG data is in compliance with the specifications of ITU-T recommendation T.81. TIFF
data is in compliance with the specifications of Adobe TIFF Revision6.0.
- The supporting status of encoding methods for JPEG data is as follows.
- Supported encoding method
DCT baseline
- Unsupported encoding methods
DCT extension
Reversible compression
Hierarchical
- The supporting status of encoding methods for TIFF data is as follows.
- Supported encoding methods
Uncompressed
ITU-T recommendation T.4 One-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.4 Two-dimensional coding
ITU-T recommendation T.6 Basic facsimile coding
ITU-T recommendation T.81 JPEG (Basic DCT only)
PackBits (Apple Macintosh PackBits)
- Unsupported encoding methods
LZW
ITU-T recommendation T.82 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.43 JBIG
ITU-T recommendation T.44 MRC
3-8
Direct Print
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Direct Printing from the Remote UI
You can perform direct printing from the Remote UI by specifying a image file in
TIFF/JPEG format. For details on the Remote UI, see "Remote UI Guide".
NOTE
Even if you cannot print or the printing position is skewed by the direct print function, you
may be able to print successfully by opening the file from the application and using the
printer driver.
Run the web browser, enter the following URL in the address
entry field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
http://<the IP address of the printer>/
NOTE
• If you are not sure about the IP address of the printer, ask your network
administrator.
• If the host name of the printer is registered in the DNS server, you can enter
["hostname"."domain name"] instead of the IP address.
Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com/
Direct Print
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
Using the Printer
1
3-9
2
Select the mode in which you want to log on to the Remote UI
([Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode]), then click [OK].
If you select [Administrator Mode], enter the values for [Password], and then
click [OK].
Using the Printer
3
3
3-10
Select the [Direct Print] menu.
Direct Print
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4
Specify [File Path].
Click [Browse], select the file, and then click [Open].
5
Using the Printer
3
Specify the print range.
If [Specify Print Range] is set to [All], entire range of the file is printed.
If [Specify Print Range] is set to [Pages], data is printed on the print range
specified by page number. Enter the starting page number and ending page
number.
Direct Print
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3-11
6
Specify the settings for [Print Settings] as the following, as
needed.
Using the Printer
3
3-12
[Copies]
Enter the number of copies (1 to 9999) to be printed.
[Paper Size]
Specify the size of the paper to be printed.
[Paper Type]
Specify the type of the paper to be printed.
[Image Orientation]
Select the orientation of the image to be printed from
[Auto], [Vertical] (portrait), and [Horizontal] (landscape).
[Print Position]
Select the printing position for the image from [Auto],
[Center], and [Top Left]. If [Auto] is selected, and if the
data to be printed is in TIFF format in which the printing
position is specified, the image is printed on the specified
position. If a printing position is not specified, the image
is printed in the center of the paper. You cannot specify a
printing position for data in JPEG format. Therefore, if
[Auto] is selected, the image is printed in the center of the
paper.
[Zoom]
Select [Off] or [Auto] based on whether the printer should
print with scaling outputs according to the printable area.
[Enlarge Print
Area]
Specifies whether the printer should print a document
with its printable area expanded. If the check box for this
option is selected, the printer prints with the printable
area expanded to the edges of the paper, with no
margins. However, the edges of the printout may be
partly missing depending on the property of the
document to be printed.
[2-Sided Printing]
Specifies whether the printer should perform automatic
2-sided printing. If the check box for this option is
selected, the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
Direct Print
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Select the binding location for 2-sided printing from
[Short Edge] and [Long Edge].
[Show Warnings]
Select the display setting for the warning message in
case of an error occurring from [Print], [Panel], and [Off].
[Print]: The printer prints the content of the error and exits
the job.
[Panel]: The error message appears in the display, and
the printer stops printing.
[Off]: The printer exits the job without displaying anything
even if an error occurs.
Click [Start Print].
3
Using the Printer
7
[Binding Location]
NOTE
• To reset the settings to the default values, click [Reset].
• Do not click [Start Print] repeatedly during the transmission of a image file. It may
take a long time to transmit an image file. If you click the button repeatedly during
the transmission, you may have a problem with the image file, failing to transmit the
file.
Direct Print
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3-13
Direct Printing from Command Prompt
You can perform direct printing from Command Prompt using LPR.
Enter the command using the following format. You cannot use any other
commands.
lpr (a space) -P (a space) <the printer name> (a space) <the file name>
The printer name: Enter the name of the printer. You can check the printer name
using the following procedure.
1. Run the web browser, enter the following URL in the address entry
field, and then press the [ENTER] key on your keyboard.
http://<the IP address of the printer>/
2. Click [Information] from the [Device Manager] menu.
3. Check [Device Name] in [Device Information].
Using the Printer
3
The file name:
Enter the name of the file to be printed.
<Input Example: If the printer name is "LBP-Printer" and the file name is
"sample.jpg">
lpr -P LBP-Printer sample.jpg
NOTE
The settings specified using the printer's control panel become effective. The settings
that can be used by the direct printing function are the following SETUP menu. For
details on the settings in each menu, see "Chapter 6 Printing Environment Settings".
- CONTROL MENU Options
- FEEDER MENU Options
- LAYOUT MENU Options
- QUALITY MENU Options
- INTERFACE MENU Options
- USER MAIN. Options
- IMAGING SETUP Options
3-14
Direct Print
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print Mode
The following shows the emulation modes that can be used with this printer.
■ PCL Mode
PCL is a command system to control page printers developed by Hewlett-Packard
Company.
■ IMAGING Mode
This mode is used by "Direct Print" that transmits a file from the host terminal to the
printer without the printer driver and allows the printer to detect the file and print.
NOTE
If such a printing problem as unreadable characters being printed occurs, print with the
print mode fixed at the appropriate one for the print data (See "MODE SELECTION," on
p. 6-36).
Print Mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3-15
3
Using the Printer
Print data of PCL-compatible applications in this mode. If the supplied PCL printer driver
is installed, data is printed in the PCL mode.
Canceling a Job
When a part of print data has already been sent to the printer, the print job may not
be finished even if you cancel the job from the computer. In this case, you can
output the data to finish the printing process of the printer or cancel the job being
processed in the printer or all the jobs.
Outputting Data (Forced Output)
Using the Printer
3
When a job is canceled from the computer or the data is less than one page, the
data may remain in the printer memory, and the job may not be completed properly.
As long as the printer remains in this state, you cannot print the next job because
the printer cannot receive the next data. In this case, force the printer to output the
print data using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Print data from PCL/UFR II Printer Driver cannot be output.
• If you have output data, the data being printed is deleted. Print the data from the
computer again as needed.
• You cannot output data while the
(Message) indicator is on. If you want to delete the
received data, perform a soft reset. (See p. 3-18)
NOTE
• The
(Job) indicator is on when any print data remains in the printer memory or when
no print data remains in the printer but a job has not yet been completed.
• If MODE TIMEOUT is specified for the job, even data less than one page is output when
the specified time has elapsed (Data from PCL/UFR II Printer Driver is not output.).
MODE TIMEOUT for a job is set to 15 seconds in the default settings.
• If the
(Job) indicator does not go off even after outputting the data, perform a soft
reset. (See p. 3-18)
1
Press the
(Reset) key.
RESET
SOFT RESET
→
The RESET menu is displayed.
3-16
Canceling a Job
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2
Select FORM FEED using [
FORM FEED
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
The data remaining in the memory is printed.
Canceling a Job (Cancel Job)
IMPORTANT
• Cancel the job while the printer is processing the data (While the
(Job) indicator is on
or blinking). No job is canceled by pressing the
(Cancel Job) key when the
(Job)
indicator is off.
• The data that has already been processed and is being printed (started to be output)
cannot be canceled. In this case, the next print data may be canceled.
• When there is any print data sent from a printer driver other than that for this printer,
multiple data may be canceled.
NOTE
When canceling a job you may not be able to cancel the job even if <03 CANCELING
JOB> is displayed.
Cancel a job using the following procedure. When canceling a job be sure that the
(Job) indicator is on or blinking (the job that you want to cancel is being received
or being processed).
1
Press the
2
When canceling the job, press [OK].
(Cancel Job) key.
CANCEL?
03 CANCELING JOB
00 READY
A4
<03 CANCELING JOB> appears, and the print data being processed is canceled.
The job is canceled when <00 READY> appears.
IMPORTANT
You cannot operate the printer while <03 CANCELING JOB> is displayed.
Canceling a Job
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3-17
3
Using the Printer
If you want to cancel the job currently being printed, perform "Cancel Job" using the
following procedure. A job cancel allows you to cancel the job currently being
received or processed. This option does not affect the next print data or the jobs
that have not been processed yet.
Canceling the Process Currently Being Performed (Soft
Reset)
If you want to cancel the process currently being performed, perform SOFT RESET
using the following procedure. A soft reset deletes the print data received by all the
interfaces, the job being processed, and the print data in the printer memory.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to operate the printer from the computer to cancel printing before canceling the
job from the printer (Soft Reset).
• When a soft reset is performed, the data being printed and the data being received by all
the interfaces is deleted. Therefore, perform printing from the computer again as needed.
• The data that has been already sent to the memory are all deleted even if it is the data of
other interface. If you are using the printer on a network, be careful so this operation
does not affect the data from other computers when performing this procedure.
Using the Printer
3
NOTE
Hard resets delete all the registered files such as the form data saved in the RAM of the
printer, but soft resets do not delete them.
1
Press the
(Reset) key.
RESET
SOFT RESET
→
The RESET menu is displayed.
2
Select SOFT RESET using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
Holding down [OK] 3 seconds or more is the operation for HARD RESET.
SOFT RESET
→
03 SOFT RESET
When <03 SOFT RESET> disappears, the soft reset is completed.
3-18
Canceling a Job
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Canceling All the Jobs (Hard Reset)
When you want to delete all the jobs and data sent to memory for some reason,
perform HARD RESET using the following procedure. A hard reset deletes the print
data received by all the interfaces, the job being processed, and the print data in
the printer memory.
1
Press the
(Reset) key.
RESET
SOFT RESET
→
The RESET menu is displayed.
2
Select SOFT RESET using [
SOFT RESET
3
] and [
].
→
Hold down [OK] until HARD RESET is displayed, then release
the button.
Hold down the button (approximately 3 seconds) until HARD RESET is displayed.
Holding down the button less than 3 seconds is the operation for SOFT RESET.
SOFT RESET
HARD RESET
03 HARD RESET
When <03 HARD RESET> disappears, the hard reset is completed.
Canceling a Job
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
Using the Printer
IMPORTANT
• If the printer is reset while it is receiving data, the data that has not yet been sent to the
memory will be sent after the reset. However, the data may not be printed properly.
• The data that has been already sent to the memory are all deleted even if it is the data of
other interface. If you are using the printer on a network, be careful so this operation
does not affect the data from other computers when performing this procedure.
3-19
Using the Printer
3
3-20
Canceling a Job
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used with this printer, and how to load
and output paper.
Paper Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Usable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Printable Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Unusable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Storing Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Storing Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Paper Source Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Paper Capacity for Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Selecting a Paper Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Precautions for Handling the Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Output Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Output Tray Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Paper Capacity of the Output Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Selecting an Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Precautions on Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Loading Standard Size Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Loading Custom Size Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Paper Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Loading Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
2-sided Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Switching Between Automatic 2-sided Printing and 1-sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Setting the Paper Size Switch Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Paper Loading Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper Requirements
IMPORTANT
• Print speed may drop depending on the settings for the paper size, paper type, and total
print pages.
- Envelope: Approximately 6 ppm
• When continuously printing the paper of 264.4 mm long or less, the safety function that
prevents damages caused by heat may slow the print speed down in stages. (The print
speed may be as slow as approximately 6 ppm.)
Usable Paper
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
Paper Size
The following shows the paper sizes that can be used with this printer. The symbol
" " indicates the paper that can be used for 1-sided printing and automatic 2-sided
printing, the symbol " " indicates the paper that can be used for only 1-sided
printing, and the symbol "-" indicates the paper that cannot be used.
Paper Source
Paper Size
Multi-purpose Tray
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
(Optional)
A4
B5
A5
Legal
Letter
Executive
Statement
-
-
16K
-
-
*2
*2
Custom Size
4-2
Paper Requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
*1
Paper Source
Paper Size
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
(Optional)
Envelope DL
110.0 mm x 220.0 mm
-
-
Envelope COM10
104.7 mm x 241.3 mm
-
-
Envelope C5
162.0 mm x 229.0 mm
-
-
Envelope Monarch
98.4 mm x 190.5 mm
-
-
Envelope B5
176.0 mm x 250.0 mm
-
-
-
-
Multi-purpose Tray
Envelope
*1 You can load paper of the following custom sizes.
-When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 76.2 to 215.9 mm; Length 127.0 to 355.6 mm
-When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is used): Width 127.0 to 215.9 mm;
Length 127.0 to 215.9 mm
*2 You can load paper of the following custom sizes.
-When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Length 210.0 to 355.6 mm
-When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is used): Width 210.0 to 215.9 mm;
Length 210.0 to 215.9 mm
Paper Type
The following shows the paper types that can be used with this printer. The symbol
" " indicates the paper that can be used for 1-sided printing and automatic 2-sided
printing, the symbol " " indicates the paper that can be used for only 1-sided
printing, and the symbol "-" indicates the paper that cannot be used.
Paper Source
Paper Type
Multi-purpose
Tray
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
(Optional)
-
-
Plain paper (60 - 89 g/m2)*
Heavy paper (90 - 120 g/m2)
Heavy paper (121 - 163 g/m2)
Transparency
-
-
Label
-
-
Index Card
-
-
-
-
Envelope
2
* 100 % recycled paper (60 - 89 g/m ) can be used as plain paper.
Paper Requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-3
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
Index Card
76.2 mm x 127.0 mm
■ Plain paper
This printer can print plain paper that is 76.2 to 215.9 mm wide, 127.0 to 355.6 mm long,
and that weighs between 60 and 89 g/m2, including the standard paper sizes: A4, B5, A5,
Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement, and 16K.
A4, Legal, and Letter sizes can be used for automatic 2-sided printing.
*
100 % recycled paper (60 - 89 g/m2) can be used as plain paper.
■ Heavy paper
This printer can print heavy paper that is 76.2 to 215.9 mm wide, 127.0 to 355.6 mm long,
and that weighs between 90 and 163 g/m2, including the standard paper sizes: A4, B5,
A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement, and 16K.
Heavy paper that weighs between 90 and 120 g/m2 can be loaded in the paper cassettes
and multi-purpose tray. Heavy paper that weighs between 121 and 163 g/m2 can be
loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Also, paper at a size of A4, Legal, or Letter that weighs
between 90 and 120 g/m2 is available for automatic 2-sided printing.
4
■ Transparency
Paper Loading and Output Tray
This printer can print A4 and Letter size transparencies.
You can feed transparencies from the multi-purpose tray.
■ Label
This printer can print A4 and Letter size labels.
You can feed labels from the multi-purpose tray.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the labels in the following conditions. Using inappropriate labels may result in
paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer.
- Peeled labels or partly used labels
- Coated labels that are easily peeled off from the backing sheet
- Labels with uneven adhesive
■ Index Card
This printer can print Index Card.
You can feed Index Card from the multi-purpose tray.
IMPORTANT
If Index Card is curled, flatten the curls by warping it in the opposite direction before
loading it.
4-4
Paper Requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Envelope
The envelopes that can be used with this printer are as follows.
You can feed envelopes from the multi-purpose tray.
Envelope Monarch
Envelope B5
(98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)
(176.0 mm x 250.0 mm)
Envelope COM10
Envelope C5
(104.7 mm x 241.3 mm)
(162.0 mm x 229.0 mm)
*
4
You cannot use envelopes at sizes of DL, COM 10, Monarch, and C5 that have a flap on the short edge.
IMPORTANT
• Do not use the following types of envelopes. Using inappropriate envelopes may result in
paper jams that are difficult to clear or may result in damage to the printer.
- Envelopes with fasteners or snaps
- Envelopes with address windows
- Envelopes with adhesive on the surface
- Wrinkled or creased envelopes
- Poorly manufactured envelopes in which the glued parts are uneven
- Irregularly-shaped envelopes
• Before loading the envelopes, flatten the stack of envelopes to release any remaining air,
and press the fold lines along the edges tight.
• Do not print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes.
• Printing speed drops when printing envelopes.
NOTE
When printing envelopes, they may be creased.
Paper Requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-5
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Envelope DL
(110.0 mm x 220.0 mm)
Printable Area
The following shows the printable area of this printer. However, if you have selected
the [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting Point] check box in the [Finishing
Details] dialog box in UFR II Printer Driver, you can extend the printable area to
near the edges of the paper. For more details, see Help of UFR II Printer Driver.
■ Plain Paper/Heavy Paper/Transparency/Label/Index Card
The printable areas are as follows.
• UFR II Printer Driver
5 mm
5 mm
5 mm
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
5 mm
• PCL5e/PCL6 Printer Driver
A
B
C
D
4-6
Paper Requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper Size
A: Left Edge B: Right Edge C: Top Edge D: Bottom Edge
A4
6.1
6.1
5.0
5.0
B5
6.1
6.1
5.0
5.0
A5
6.1
6.1
5.0
5.0
Legal
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Letter
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Executive
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Statement
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
16K
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Custom Size
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Index Card
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
(Unit: mm)
■ Envelope
You cannot print on any area within 10 mm of the edges of paper.
You may have to change the printable area before printing, depending on the application
you use.
(Sample: Envelope COM10)
10 mm
241.3 mm
(9.50 in.)
10 mm
10 mm
104.7 mm
(4.13 in.)
10 mm
Unusable Paper
To avoid problems such as paper jams and other malfunctions, the following types
of paper should never be used:
IMPORTANT
• Paper that jams easily
- Paper that is too thick or too thin
- Irregularly-shaped paper
- Wet or moist paper
- Torn or damaged paper
- Rough, extremely smooth, or glossy paper
- Paper with binding holes or perforations
- Curled or creased paper
- Specially coated paper (coated paper for inkjet printers, etc.)
- Labels with backing sheet that is easily peeled off
- Paper that has already been printed by a copy machine or another laser printer (The
reverse side of the paper is also unusable. Using the multi-purpose tray, however, you
can perform 2-sided printing manually on the other side of paper previously printed by
this printer. You cannot print on the printed side again.)
- Paper with jagged edges (paper that has been poorly cut)
- Wrinkled paper
- Paper with the corners folded
• Paper that changes its quality at a high temperature
- Paper that contains ink that melts, burns, evaporates or emits harmful gases at or lower
than the heating temperature (approx. 270 °C or 518 °F) of the fixing unit
- Heat-sensitive paper
- Treated color paper
- Specially coated paper (coated paper for inkjet printers, etc.)
- Paper with adhesive on the surface
Paper Requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-7
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
• Paper that damages the printer
- Carbon paper
- Paper with staples, clips, ribbons or tapes
- Paper that has already been printed by a copy machine or another laser printer (The
reverse side of the paper is also unusable. Using the multi-purpose tray, however, you
can perform 2-sided printing manually on the other side of paper previously printed by
this printer. You cannot print on the printed side again.)
• Paper that is difficult for the toner to fix onto
- Paper with rough surfaces
- Specially coated paper (coated paper for inkjet printers, etc.)
- Paper containing thick fibers
Storing Paper
The quality of paper may deteriorate if it is stored improperly even when the paper
meets the normal specifications. Inferior paper may cause misfeeds, paper jams, or
deterioration in print quality.
Observe the following guidelines when storing and handling paper:
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
IMPORTANT
• Store paper away from moisture.
• Paper wrappers help avoiding moisture and dryness. Keep paper in the wrapper until it is
ready to be used. Store all unused paper in a wrapper.
• Store paper on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper on the floor where water and moisture can accumulate.
• When you store paper, prevent it from curling or being folded.
• Do not store paper vertically or store too many stacks of paper in one pile.
• Do not store paper in places exposed to direct sunlight or places with low humidity.
• If the paper storage room and work area differ from each other significantly in
temperature or humidity, keep packed paper stack in the work area for at least one day
prior to printing so that it can adapt to the new environment. When paper is moved to a
location where the temperature or humidity differs significantly, the paper may curl or
become creased.
4-8
Paper Requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Storing Printouts
When handling or storing printouts printed by this printer, be careful of the following
points:
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
• Avoid storing printouts with PVC materials such as clear folders. Otherwise toner may
melt and stick to the PVC material.
• Use insoluble adhesive when gluing printouts. Toner may melt when soluble adhesive is
used. Before using the adhesive, test it with paper that is no longer required.
Make sure that the printed paper is completely dry before placing one over another.
Toner may melt if they are placed together half-dried.
• Store paper on a flat surface. Toner may peel when they are folded or creased.
• Avoid storing printouts at high temperatures. Otherwise toner may melt and blot.
• Put printouts in a binder when storing them for a long period of time (two years or longer).
(Printouts may discolor when they are stored for a long period of time.)
Paper Requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-9
Paper Source
Paper Source Type
This printer has the following paper sources:
(A): Multi-purpose Tray
(B): Cassette 1
(C): Cassette 2 (Optional)
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
(A)
(B)
(C)
IMPORTANT
If you are printing from Cassette 2, make sure that Cassette 1 is set before printing. If you
print from Cassette 2 when Cassette 1 is not set, this will cause paper jams.
Paper Capacity for Paper Source
Paper Capacity
Paper Type
4-10
Multi-purpose Tray
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
(Optional)
Plain paper (80 g/m2)
Approx. 50 sheets
Approx. 250 sheets
Approx. 250 sheets
Heavy paper (91 g/m2)
Approx. 40 sheets
Approx. 200 sheets
Approx. 200 sheets
Heavy paper (128 g/m2)
Approx. 25 sheets
-
-
Transparency
Approx. 40 sheets
-
-
Label
Approx. 20 sheets
-
-
Index Card
Approx. 15 sheets
-
-
Envelope
Approx. 5 sheets
-
-
Paper Source
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Selecting a Paper Source
A paper source can be selected using the following procedure.
■ When printing from Windows or Macintosh
Select a paper source in the printer driver. Because the default setting for the paper
selection in the printer driver is [Auto], if a paper size is specified by an application, the
printer selects the paper source automatically and feeds paper from the paper source.
Even when the paper source runs out of paper during printing, if paper of the same size is
loaded in other paper source, the paper source is switched automatically and the paper is
fed.
If you want to specify a paper source, select the paper source in the printer driver. For
more details on using the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which you cannot
use the printer driver, select a paper source using the control panel. The default setting for
this printer's paper source is set to AUTO.
Select a paper source with the printer's control panel using the following procedure.
1
Press the
(Feeder Selection) key.
PAPER SOURCE
→
PAPER SOURCE is displayed in the display.
2
3
Select PAPER SOURCE using [
PAPER SOURCE
→
=AUTO
→
Select the paper source using [
CASSETTE 1
→
=CASSETTE 1
→
] and [
], then press [OK].
] and [
], then press [OK].
Paper Source
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-11
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
■ When printing from DOS or UNIX
NOTE
• CASSETTE 2 is displayed only when the paper feeder is installed.
• If paper of the same size is loaded in two or more paper sources when the paper
source setting is specified to be selected automatically, paper is fed from the upper
paper source regardless of the status of the
(Paper Source) indicators. When
the paper source runs out of paper, the paper source automatically switches to
other one in which paper of the same size is loaded.
Precautions for Handling the Multi-purpose Tray or Paper
Cassette
Be careful of the following points when handling the multi-purpose tray or paper
cassette.
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to turn the printer ON once when loading paper in the paper cassette for the first
time after installing the paper feeder.
• Do not pull out the paper cassette while the printer is printing. This may result in paper
jams or damage to the printer.
• Do not touch the paper in the multi-purpose tray or pull it out during printing. This may
result in a faulty operation.
• Refill the paper cassette after all the loaded paper runs out. If the cassette is refilled
when paper still remains in the cassette, it may result in misfeeds.
• Do not put anything other than the printing paper on the multi-purpose tray. Also, do not
press on top of or apply excessive force to the multi-purpose tray. This may result in
damage to the multi-purpose tray.
• Do not touch the black rubber pad (A) in the paper cassette. This may result in misfeeds.
(A)
• If you are printing from Cassette 2, make sure that Cassette 1 is set before printing. If you
print from Cassette 2 when Cassette 1 is not set, this will cause paper jams.
NOTE
Remove the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray before closing it. Keep the
multi-purpose tray closed when it is not used.
4-12
Paper Source
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output Trays
Output Tray Types
This printer has two output trays: "face-down output tray" on the top of the printer
unit and "face-up output slot" on the rear of the printer unit.
Do not switch one output tray to another during printing. This may result in paper
jams.
• Keep your hands or clothing away from the roller in the output area. Even if the
printer is not printing, sudden rotation of the roller may catch your hands or
clothing, resulting in personal injury.
• The paper may be hot immediately after being output. Be careful when removing
the paper as well as when aligning the removed paper, especially after printing
continuously. Otherwise, this may result in burns.
Face-down Output Tray
Printed paper is output to the face-down output tray with the printed side facing
down.
IMPORTANT
• Do not touch the paper during automatic 2-sided printing until it is completely output to
the face-down output tray. In automatic 2-sided printing, the paper is partially output once
after printed on its surface and is fed again to be printed on its reverse side.
• When performing automatic 2-sided printing, the printer can output paper only to the
face-down output tray.
Output Trays
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-13
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
CAUTION
• The surroundings of the face-down output tray are hot during printing or immediately
after printing. When taking out of the paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to
touch the surroundings of the face-down output tray.
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
NOTE
The face-down output tray can hold up to approximately 125 sheets of plain paper (80 g/
m2). The paper capacity varies depending on the paper type and paper size. For more
details, see "Paper Capacity of the Output Trays," on p. 4-15.
Face-up Output Slot
Printed paper is output to the face-up output slot on the rear of the printer unit with
the printed side facing up. The face-up output slot is suitable to print transparencies,
labels, or envelopes which tend to curl, since the printed paper is output flattened.
4-14
Output Trays
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION
The face-up output slot and its surroundings become hot during or immediately
after using the printer. Do not touch the face-up output slot and its
surroundings, as doing so may result in burns.
IMPORTANT
• When outputting paper to the face-up output slot, you cannot perform automatic 2-sided
printing.
• When paper is output to the face-up output slot, take out one piece at a time each time it
is output.
Paper Capacity of the Output Trays
-: The paper cannot be output
Output Tray*
Paper Type
Face-down Output Tray
Face-up Output Slot
Approx. 125 sheets
-
Approx. 50 sheets
-
Approx. 30 sheets
1 sheet
1 sheet
1 sheet
Label
Approx. 10 sheets
1 sheet
Index Card
Approx. 10 sheets
1 sheet
Envelope
Approx. 10 sheets
1 sheet
Plain paper (80
g/m2)
Heavy paper (91 g/m2)
Heavy paper (128
g/m2)
Transparency
* Actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation environment, paper type and paper size.
Output Trays
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-15
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
Selecting an Output Tray
Switching to the Face-up Output Slot
When switching an output tray to the face-up output slot, open the output selection
cover as shown in the figure.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
Switching to the Face-down Output Tray
When switching an output tray to the face-down output tray, close the output
selection cover as shown in the figure.
4-16
Output Trays
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
The paper cassette can be loaded with plain paper (60 to 89 g/m2), heavy paper
(90 to 120 g/m2) at sizes of A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, and Custom Size.
When the paper cassette runs out of paper, <11 NO "size" PAPER> appears in the
display, or the
(Paper Source) indicator blinks indicating the status. Refill the
cassette.
This printer comes with a paper cassette (Cassette 1) as standard. Cassette 2 is
added by installing the optional paper feeder.
IMPORTANT
• Match the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette and the paper size in the
SETUP menu. If they do not match, the message <41 CHK PAPER SZE> appears, and
the printing is not performed properly.
• Match the settings for CASSETTE1 SIZE and CASSETTE2 SIZE in the SETUP menu of
the printer and those in the printer driver. If they do not match, the message <PC LOAD
"size"> appears. In this case, the setting values for CASSETTE1 SIZE and CASSETTE2
SIZE are changed to those in the printer driver by pressing the
(Online) key, allowing
you to continue printing.
• If you are printing from Cassette 2, make sure that Cassette 1 is set before printing. If you
print from Cassette 2 when Cassette 1 is not set, this will cause paper jams.
• For more details on the usable paper, see "Usable Paper," on p. 4-2.
• For details on handling the paper cassette, see "Precautions for Handling the
Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette," on p. 4-12.
• Do not load paper other than plain paper (60 to 89 g/m2) and heavy paper (90 to 120 g/
m2). This may result in paper jams or damage to the printer.
NOTE
• Load paper in Cassette 2 (Only when the optional paper feeder is installed) in the same
manner as you load paper in Cassette 1.
• If you are printing from an operating system on which the printer driver cannot be used,
previously specify the paper source to CASSETTE 1 or CASSETTE 2. (See p. 4-11)
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-17
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
When printing from the paper cassette, you need to specify the following settings.
■ Loading Standard Size Paper (See p. 4-20)
■ Loading Custom Size Paper (See p. 4-25)
■ Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Paper Cassette (See p. 4-30)
If you changed the size of the paper in the paper cassette, specify the following settings
using the control panel. You do not need to specify the settings if you did not change the
size of the paper.
The FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu
• CASSETTE1 SIZE = the size of the paper loaded in Cassette 1
• CASSETTE2 SIZE = the size of the paper loaded in Cassette 2
When printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which the printer driver
cannot be used, specify the following settings in addition to CASSETTE1 SIZE and
CASSETTE2 SIZE.
The FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
• STD PAPER SIZE = the size of the loaded paper (See p. 6-16)
• STD PAPER TYPE = the type of the loaded paper (See p. 6-19)
■ Specifying the Paper Settings in the Printer Driver (See Driver Guide)
When printing from the printer driver, specify the following settings. For more details on
using the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
[Page Setup] Sheet
[Output Size] = the size of the loaded paper
[Paper Source] Sheet
[Paper Source] = [Cassette 1]
[Cassette 2]
[Paper Type] = [Plain Paper]:
[Plain Paper L]:
Plain Paper (60 - 89 g/m2)
Specify when paper curls excessively on printing
with [Plain Paper] selected.
[Heavy Paper 1]: Heavy Paper (90 - 120 g/m2)
Precautions on Loading Paper
Load paper when the printer status is in any of the following. When the
(Job)
indicator is blinking, the printer is printing. Do not pull out the paper cassette.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to turn the printer ON once when loading paper in the paper cassette for the first
time after installing the paper feeder.
• Be sure not to open the covers or paper cassette during printing. The printer may stop,
disabling printing.
4-18
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ When the
(Job) indicator is off
OFF
4
11 NO A4 PAPER
Paper Loading and Output Tray
■ When a message that informs you of a paper-out condition or requests
paper replacement is displayed
PC LOAD A4
■ When the printer is OFF
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-19
Loading Standard Size Paper
1
Pull out the paper cassette.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
CAUTION
Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the printer before loading paper.
If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the paper
cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in
personal injury.
2
When changing the size of the paper to be loaded, change the
positions of the paper guides.
The paper sizes indicated on the paper guides are abbreviated as follows.
4-20
Paper Size
Paper Guides
Legal
LGL
Letter
LTR
Executive
EXEC
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
● Slide the side paper guides to the size mark for the paper to be
loaded.
The side paper guides move together. Align the position of (A) with the mark for
the size of the paper to be loaded.
How to slide the side paper guides
aHold the lock release lever.
bSlide the paper guides to the size mark for the paper to be loaded.
Top View
(A)
Top View
b
NOTE
If you are using B5 size paper (182 mm x 257 mm), set the paper guide to "JIS B5".
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-21
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
a
● Slide the rear paper guide to the size mark for the paper to be
loaded.
Align the position of (A) with the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.
How to slide the rear paper guide
aHold the lock release lever.
bSlide the paper guide to the size mark for the paper to be loaded.
Top View
(A)
a
4
Top View
Paper Loading and Output Tray
b
IMPORTANT
Do not use the "8.5 x 13" position.
3
Load the paper stack so that the rear edge is aligned with the
paper guide.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
4-22
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to load paper in portrait orientation.
If the paper guide is set at a wrong position, this may result in misfeeds.
• If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at
once. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the stack
on a hard, flat surface.
NOTE
To print paper with letterheads or logos, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 4-51)
and load the paper in the proper orientation.
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-23
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
• Be sure to check if the paper guide is at the position of the size of the loaded paper.
4
Hold down the paper as shown in the figure, then set it under
the hooks (A) on the paper guides.
Check the following points.
• Whether the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks (B)
• Whether there is sufficient space between the hooks of the paper guides and
the paper stack
(B)
(A)
(A)
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
IMPORTANT
The following shows the paper capacity of the paper cassette. Be sure that the
paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks. If the paper stack exceeds the
load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.
- Plain paper
Approx. 250 sheets (Ex. 80 g/m2)
- Heavy paper Approx. 200 sheets (Ex. 91 g/m2)
4-24
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5
Set the paper cassette in the printer.
Push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper
cassette is flush with the front surface of the printer.
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette, be careful not to catch your fingers.
This printer's paper cassette cannot automatically detect the paper size. Therefore, you
need to register the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette.
See "Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Paper Cassette" (p. 4-30) to register the
paper size.
Loading Custom Size Paper
You can load paper of the following custom sizes.
• When
loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 148.0 to 215.9 mm; Length
210.0 to 355.6 mm
• When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): Width 210.0 to 215.9 mm; Length 210.0 to 215.9 mm
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-25
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
1
Pull out the paper cassette.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
CAUTION
Be sure to take the paper cassette out of the printer before loading paper.
If paper is loaded while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the paper
cassette may drop or the printer may become damaged resulting in
personal injury.
2
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper is aligned with
the front side of the paper cassette.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
4-26
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
• If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at
once. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then align the edges of the stack
on a hard, flat surface.
• When you are printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load
the paper either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, load the paper in
landscape orientation when the setting for CASSETTE1 SIZE or CASSETTE2
SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES on printing custom size paper of its long edges 215.9
mm or less. When you are not printing from UFR II Printer Driver, load the paper in
portrait orientation.
NOTE
To print paper with letterheads or logos, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 4-51)
and load the paper in the proper orientation.
4
Slide the paper guides.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
3
● Slide the side paper guides to be aligned with the loaded paper.
The side paper guides move together.
How to slide the side paper guides
aHold the lock release lever.
bSlide the paper guides to be aligned with the loaded paper.
Top View
a
b
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-27
IMPORTANT
Be sure to align the paper guides with the width of the paper. If the paper guides
are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
● Slide the rear paper guide to be aligned with the loaded paper.
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
How to slide the rear paper guide
aHold the lock release lever.
bSlide the paper guide to be aligned with the loaded paper.
a
Top View
4-28
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b
4
Hold down the paper as shown in the figure, then set it under
the hooks (A) on the paper guides.
Check the following points.
• Whether the paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks (B)
• Whether there is sufficient space between the hooks of the paper guides and
the paper stack
(B)
(A)
(A)
IMPORTANT
The following shows the paper capacity of the paper cassette. Be sure that the
paper stack does not exceed the load limit marks. If the paper stack exceeds the
load limit marks, this may result in misfeeds.
- Plain paper Approx. 250 sheets (Ex. 80 g/m2)
- Heavy paper Approx. 200 sheets (Ex. 91 g/m2)
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-29
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
5
Set the paper cassette in the printer.
Push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper
cassette is flush with the front surface of the printer.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette, be careful not to catch your fingers.
This printer's paper cassette cannot automatically detect the paper size. Therefore, you
need to register the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette.
See "Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Paper Cassette" (p. 4-30) to register the
paper size.
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Paper Cassette
This printer's paper cassette cannot automatically detect the paper size. Therefore,
when you loaded paper in the paper cassette, you need to specify the size of the
paper loaded in the paper cassette using the control panel. When using standard
size paper, specify its size. When loading custom size paper, specify CUSTOM
SIZE or CUSTOM SIZE R. The paper size setting for the paper cassette is set to
"A4" by default.
Specify the paper size setting for the paper cassette using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Match the paper size specified in the SETUP menu of the printer and that specified in the
printer driver. If they do not match, the message <PC LOAD "size"> appears. In this
case, the setting values for CASSETTE1 SIZE and CASSETTE2 SIZE are changed to
those in the printer driver by pressing the
(Online) key, allowing you to continue
printing.
4-30
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• When custom size paper is loaded, specify the settings for CASSETTE1 SIZE and/or
NOTE
The names of the following paper sizes are indicated by an abbreviation.
Legal: LGL, Letter: LTR, Executive: EXEC
1
Press the
(Settings) key.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
2
→
Select FEEDER MENU using [
FEEDER MENU
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
3
Select CASSETTE1 SIZE or CASSETTE2 SIZE using [
[ ], then press [OK].
] and
CASSETTE1 SIZE →
=A4
→
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-31
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
CASSETTE2 SIZE as follows.
- When the paper is loaded in landscape orientation: CUSTOM SIZE
- When the paper is loaded in portrait orientation: CUSTOM SIZE R
• When you change the paper loaded in the paper cassette frequently, it is convenient if
you set CASSETTE1 SIZE and/or CASSETTE2 SIZE to MIXED SIZES. When
CASSETTE1 SIZE and/or CASSETTE2 SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES, you do not need to
specify the settings for CASSETTE1 SIZE and/or CASSETTE2 SIZE each time the
different size paper is loaded. However, when specifying MIXED SIZES, make sure that
the size of the loaded paper matches the paper size specified in the printer driver before
printing. If they do not match, the printer may stop printing, displaying the message <41
CHK PAPER SZE>, or a paper jam may occur. Be sure to check if the paper size
specified in the printer driver matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette
before using the printer.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size paper
of its long edges 215.9 mm or less when CASSETTE1 SIZE and/or CASSETTE2 SIZE is
set to MIXED SIZES, load the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing
from UFR II Printer Driver, load the paper in portrait orientation.
4
Select the paper size using [
B5
→
=B5
→
] and [
], then press [OK].
"=" is displayed on the left of the paper size, and the paper size for the paper
cassette is specified.
When printing from the printer driver on Windows or Macintosh, configure the printer
driver. (See Driver Guide)
When printing from DOS or UNIX, specify the settings for STD PAPER SIZE (See p.
6-16) and STD PAPER TYPE (See p. 6-19) using the control panel.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
4-32
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
The multi-purpose tray can be loaded with up to approximately 50 sheets of plain
paper (80 g/m2) at sizes of A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, Index Card,
Statement, 16K, and paper of the following custom paper sizes.
• Custom
When printing from the multi-purpose tray, you need to specify the following
settings.
IMPORTANT
• Match the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE in the SETUP menu of the printer and that in the
printer driver. If they do not match, the message <PC LOAD "size"> appears. In this
case, the setting value for TRAY PAPER SIZE is changed to that in the printer driver by
pressing the
(Online) key, allowing you to continue printing.
• For more details on the usable paper, see "Usable Paper," on p. 4-2.
• For details on how to handle the multi-purpose tray, see "Precautions for Handling the
Multi-purpose Tray or Paper Cassette," on p. 4-12.
NOTE
If you are printing from an operating system on which the printer driver cannot be used,
previously specify the paper source to TRAY. (See p. 4-11)
■ Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes) (See p. 4-35)
■ Loading Envelopes (See p. 4-39)
■ Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray (See p. 4-44)
If you changed the size of the paper in the multi-purpose tray, specify the following
settings using the control panel. You do not need to specify the settings if you did not
change the size of the paper.
The FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu
• TRAY PAPER SIZE = the size of the loaded paper
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-33
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Size Paper
When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 76.2 to 215.9 mm; Length 127.0
to 355.6 mm
When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer Driver is
used): Width 127.0 to 215.9 mm; Length 127.0 to 215.9 mm
Paper that cannot be loaded in the paper cassette such as transparencies and
envelopes can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
When printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which the printer driver
cannot be used, specify the following settings in addition to TRAY PAPER SIZE.
The FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu
• STD PAPER SIZE = the size of the loaded paper (See p. 6-16)
• STD PAPER TYPE = the type of the loaded paper (See p. 6-19)
■ Specifying the Paper Settings in the Printer Driver (See Driver Guide)
When printing from the printer driver, specify the following settings. For more details on
using the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
[Page Setup] Sheet
[Output Size] = the size of the loaded paper
[Paper Source] Sheet
[Paper Source] = [Multi-Purpose Tray]
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
[Paper Type] = [Plain Paper]:
[Plain Paper L]:
[Heavy Paper 1]:
[Heavy Paper 2]:
[Heavy Paper 3]:
[Transparency]:
[Label]:
[Envelope]:
4-34
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Plain Paper (60 - 89 g/m2)
Specify when paper curls excessively on printing
with [Plain Paper] selected.
Heavy Paper (90 - 120 g/m2)
Heavy Paper (121 - 163 g/m2)
Specify when you want to improve the toner fixation
on printing with [Paper Type] set to [Heavy Paper 2].
Transparencies
Labels
Envelopes
Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes)
Perform the following procedure to load plain paper, heavy paper, transparencies,
labels, or Index Card in the multi-purpose tray.
1
Open the multi-purpose tray.
Holding the opening at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.
2
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
Pull out the auxiliary tray.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to pull out the auxiliary tray when loading paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-35
3
When loading long-size paper such as A4, open the tray
extension.
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
4-36
Spread the paper guides a little wider than the actual paper
width.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Before loading transparencies or labels, fan them in small
batches and align the edges.
Thoroughly fan in small batches
Tap the edges on a flat
surface a few times
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to fan the transparencies or labels thoroughly before loading them. If they
are not fanned enough, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at once, causing paper
jams.
• When fanning or aligning the transparencies, try to hold the edges to avoid
touching the printing surface.
• Take care not to mark or stain the printing surface of the transparencies with
fingerprints, dust, or oil. This may result in poor print quality.
6
Gently load the stack of paper with the printing side facing up
until it touches the back of the tray.
Be sure that the paper stack is loaded under the load limit guides (A).
(A)
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-37
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
5
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
• The multi-purpose tray can be loaded with up to the number of sheets listed below.
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guides.
- Plain paper (Ex. 80 g/m2)
: Approx. 50 sheets
- Heavy paper (Ex. 91 g/m2)
: Approx. 40 sheets
- Heavy paper (Ex. 128 g/m2) : Approx. 25 sheets
- Transparency
: Approx. 40 sheets
- Label
: Approx. 20 sheets
- Index Card
: Approx. 15 sheets
• Load the paper so that it is straight.
• If the rear edge of the paper stack is not properly aligned, it may result in misfeeds
or paper jams.
• If the paper is curled or folded at corners, flatten it before loading it in the printer.
• If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper may be fed at
once. In this case, align the edges of the stack on a hard, flat surface.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size
paper of its long edges 215.9 mm or less when TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED
SIZES, load the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing from
UFR II Printer Driver, load the paper in portrait orientation.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
NOTE
To print paper with letterheads or logos, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 4-51)
and load the paper in the proper orientation.
7
4-38
Align the paper guides with both sides of the stack.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
Be sure to align the paper guides with the width of the paper. If the paper guides
are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Next, specify the paper size for the multi-purpose tray (See p. 4-44).
Loading Envelopes
You can load envelopes at sizes of DL, COM10, C5, Monarch, and B5 in the
multi-purpose tray. Use the following procedure when loading envelopes in the
multi-purpose tray.
1
Open the multi-purpose tray.
Holding the opening at the center of the printer, open the multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-39
2
4
Pull out the auxiliary tray.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
Be sure to pull out the auxiliary tray when loading paper in the multi-purpose tray.
3
4-40
When loading long-size paper such as Envelope B5 etc, open
the tray extension.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4
Spread the paper guides a little wider than the actual envelope
width.
5
Place the stack of envelopes on a flat surface, flatten them to
release any remaining air, and be sure that the edges are
pressed tightly.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-41
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
6
7
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
8
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten curls as
shown in the figure.
Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.
Gently load the stack of envelopes with the address side
facing up until it touches the back of the tray.
Be sure that the stack of envelopes is loaded under the load limit guides (A).
(A)
4-42
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
• Up to approximately 5 envelopes can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Make
sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guides.
• You cannot print on the reverse side (glued side) of envelopes.
• When loading envelopes at a size of DL, COM10, C5, or Monarch, load them so
that the flap is toward the left of the printer when viewed from the front.
• When loading envelopes of the Envelope B5 size, close the flaps and load them so
that the envelopes are fed from the top (the edge with the flap).
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-43
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
9
4
Align the paper guides with both sides of the stack.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
Be sure to align the paper guides with the width of the envelopes. If the paper
guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
Next, specify the paper size for the multi-purpose tray (See p. 4-44).
Specifying the Size of the Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
When you loaded paper in the multi-purpose tray, specify the paper size for the
multi-purpose tray using the control panel. When using paper or envelopes of
standard size, specify its size. When loading custom size paper, specify CUSTOM
SIZE or CUSTOM SIZE R. The paper size setting for the multi-purpose tray is set to
"A4" by default.
Specify the paper size setting for the multi-purpose tray using the following
procedure.
4-44
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE
The names of the following paper sizes are indicated by an abbreviation.
Legal: LGL, Letter: LTR, Executive: EXEC, Statement: STMT
1
Press the
(Settings) key.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
2
→
Select FEEDER MENU using [
FEEDER MENU
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
3
Select TRAY PAPER SIZE using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
=A4
→
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-45
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
• Match the paper size specified in the SETUP menu of the printer and that specified in the
printer driver. If they do not match, the message <PC LOAD "size"> appears. In this
case, the setting value for TRAY PAPER SIZE is changed to that in the printer driver by
pressing the
(Online) key, allowing you to continue printing.
• When custom size paper is loaded, specify the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE as follows.
- When the paper is loaded in landscape orientation: CUSTOM SIZE
- When the paper is loaded in portrait orientation: CUSTOM SIZE R
• When you change the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray frequently, it is convenient if
TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES. If TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES,
you do not need to specify the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE each time you load different
size paper. However, when specifying MIXED SIZES, make sure that the size of the
paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray matches the paper size specified in the printer
driver before printing. If they do not match, the printer may stop printing, displaying the
message <41 CHK PAPER SZE>, or a paper jam may occur. Be sure to check if the
paper size specified in the printer driver matches the size of the paper loaded in the
multi-purpose tray before using the printer.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size paper
of its long edges 215.9 mm or less when TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES, load
the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing from UFR II Printer Driver,
load the paper in portrait orientation.
4
Select the paper size using [
B5
→
=B5
→
] and [
], then press [OK].
"=" is displayed on the left of the paper size, and the paper size for the
multi-purpose tray is specified.
When printing from the printer driver on Windows or Macintosh, configure the printer
driver. (See Driver Guide)
When printing from DOS or UNIX, specify the settings for STD PAPER SIZE (See p.
6-16) and STD PAPER TYPE (See p. 6-19) using the control panel.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
4-46
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2-sided Printing
This printer is equipped with a function that can perform automatic 2-sided printing.
Plain paper and heavy paper (90 to 120 g/m2) at sizes of A4, Legal, and Letter can
be used for automatic 2-sided printing.
By using the multi-purpose tray, you can perform manual 2-sided printing (printing
the other side of previously printed paper) on paper unavailable for automatic
2-sided printing.
NOTE
On automatic 2-sided printing, the reverse side of the paper is printed first, therefore the
paper should be loaded in the opposite orientation to that for 1-sided printing. If printing
on such paper with letterheads, in which faces and directional orientations are specified,
see "Paper Loading Orientation" (p. 4-51) and load the paper in the proper orientation.
2-sided Printing
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-47
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
IMPORTANT
• You cannot perform automatic 2-sided printing on heavy paper (121 to 163 g/m2),
transparencies, labels, and envelopes.
• When automatic 2-sided printing is specified, and a job with odd number of pages is
printed, the printing surface of the last page are as follows according to the setting for
ALT.METHOD (See p. 6-23) or the paper source.
- When printing from the paper cassette
If ALT.METHOD is set to ON, the printer prints on the underside of the loaded paper.
If ALT.METHOD is set to OFF, the printer prints on the upper side of the loaded paper.
- When printing from the multi-purpose tray.
If ALT.METHOD is set to ON, the printer prints on the upper side of the loaded paper.
If ALT.METHOD is set to OFF, the printer prints on the underside of the loaded paper.
• Do not touch the paper during automatic 2-sided printing until it is completely output to
the face-down output tray. In automatic 2-sided printing, the paper is partially output once
after printed on its surface and is fed again to be printed on its reverse side.
• Be sure to close the output selection cover before performing automatic 2-sided printing.
• When performing automatic 2-sided printing, be sure to confirm that the paper size
switch lever is set to the appropriate position. If the lever is not set to the appropriate
position, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams. For details on the procedure for
setting the paper size switch lever, see "Setting the Paper Size Switch Lever," on p. 4-49.
Switching Between Automatic 2-sided Printing and
1-sided Printing
Perform automatic 2-sided printing using the following procedure.
■ When printing from Windows
When performing automatic 2-sided printing, set [Print Style] in the [Finishing] sheet in the
printer driver to [2-sided Printing]. For more details on using the printer driver, see Help of
the printer driver.
■ When printing from Macintosh
When performing automatic 2-sided printing, specify the settings for 2-sided printing in the
printer driver. For more details on using the printer driver, see Help of the printer driver.
4
■ When printing from DOS or UNIX
Paper Loading and Output Tray
When you are printing from DOS, UNIX, or other operating system on which you cannot
use the printer driver, specify the settings using the control panel.
Switch between automatic 2-sided printing and 1-sided printing with the printer's control
panel using the following procedure.
1
Press the
(Settings) key.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
2
→
Select FEEDER MENU using [
FEEDER MENU
] and [
], then press [OK].
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
3
Select 2-SIDED PRINT. using [
2-SIDED PRINT. →
=OFF
4-48
→
2-sided Printing
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4
Select ON using [
] and [
ON
→
=ON
→
], then press [OK].
"=" is displayed on the left of ON, and 2-sided printing is specified.
Setting the Paper Size Switch Lever
When performing automatic 2-sided printing, be sure to confirm the paper size
switch lever is set to the appropriate position. When the paper size switch lever is
not set to the appropriate position, this may result in paper jams.
Set the paper size switch lever using the following procedure.
Paper Loading and Output Tray
1
4
Open the duplex unit cover.
Holding the opening at the center of the duplex unit cover, open it gently.
2-sided Printing
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4-49
2
Set the blue paper size switch lever (A) to the appropriate
position according to the paper size for 2-sided printing.
For A4 size, draw the paper size switch lever toward you.
For Letter or Legal size, push the paper size switch lever into the printer.
LTR
LGL
A4
A4
LTR
LGL
4
Paper Loading and Output Tray
(A)
(A)
IMPORTANT
When performing automatic 2-sided printing, be sure to confirm that the paper size
switch lever is set to the appropriate position. If the lever is not set to the
appropriate position, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams.
3
Close the duplex unit cover.
Holding the opening at the center of the duplex unit cover, close it gently.
4-50
2-sided Printing
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper Loading Orientation
To print paper with letterheads or logos, load the paper in the proper orientation as
follows.
in the table indicates the feeding directions.
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Cassette
Paper Cassette
(1-sided Printing) (Automatic 2-sided Printing) (1-sided Printing)
Portrait Layout
Landscape
Layout
Loading custom size paper in
landscape orientation
Portrait Layout
Landscape
Layout
4
-
-
Paper Loading Orientation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper Loading and Output Tray
Loading standard size paper, or
loading custom size paper in portrait
orientation
4-51
Loading standard size paper, or
loading custom size paper in portrait
orientation
Landscape
Layout
Multi-purpose Tray
Multi-purpose Tray
(Manual 2-sided Printing) (Automatic 2-sided Printing)
Portrait Layout
Paper Loading and Output Tray
4
Loading custom size paper in
landscape orientation
Portrait Layout
Landscape
Layout
-
-
NOTE
For details on loading orientation of envelopes, see "Loading Envelopes," on p. 4-39.
4-52
Paper Loading Orientation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The Printing Environment
5
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the functions and categories of the menu displayed in the printer's
control panel, how to use the operation keys, and how to view the display.
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Setting Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Menu Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
How to Use the Operation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
How to View the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
How to View the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Menu Functions and Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
UTILITY Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
JOB Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
RESET Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
CANCEL JOB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Initializing the SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu Functions
This section describes the menu functions and their categories.
Menu Functions
Before printing, specify the total print pages, paper size, etc. Generally, these
settings are specified in an application or printer driver.
This printer, however, is supplied with many items as well as the settings for the
total print pages and paper size, enabling printing for a wide array of uses. Some
settings for this printer cannot be specified by application or printer driver. You can
specify these settings using the "menu functions".
5
The Printing Environment
You can specify the settings using the menu functions easily because in the menu
functions a variety of settings are classified by purpose.
There are the following two kinds of procedures for specifying the menu functions.
■ Settings Using the Printer's Control Panel
Specify the settings by pressing the keys while checking the display on the printer.
■ Settings Using the Remote UI
Some settings specified by the control panel can be specified by a web browser from your
computer.
NOTE
• For this section, this manual describes only the procedures for specifying the menu
functions using the control panel. For details on specifying the settings using the Remote
UI, see "Remote UI Guide".
• The settings for the menu functions are registered to the memory (NVRAM) in which data
is not deleted normally even if the printer is turned OFF. Therefore, even after cycling the
power of the printer, it starts with its settings unchanged from when the printer was
turned OFF last time.
5-2
Menu Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Setting Priority
When the setting values for the same item are different between an application or
the printer driver and the menu functions, the setting specified in the application or
printer driver is effective. When specifying an item only in the menu functions using
the control panel or the Remote UI, the most recently specified setting is effective.
Priority
High
Low
Application soft
Printer driver
Control panel
Remote UI
The most resent
setting is effective
Depending on the items, they become effective after cycling the power of the printer
or performing a hard reset.
● Setting Priority of Direct Print
When specifying a setting only in the menu functions using the control panel or the
[Device Settings] menu in the Remote UI, the most recently specified setting is effective.
The direct print function gives priority to the contents specified using the [Direct Print]
menu in the Remote UI or tags in IFD (Image file directory) that the header of TIFF data of
image file has over those specified using the control panel or the [Device Settings] menu
in the Remote UI.
Priority
High
Low
[Direct Print] Menu in the
Remote UI
[Device Settings] Menu
in the Remote UI
Tags in TIFF data
Control Panel
Some of the tag function that the header of TIFF data has may be disabled.
Menu Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5-3
5
The Printing Environment
The printer driver and Remote UI are supplied with this printer. For details on using
the printer driver or Remote UI, see "Driver Guide", Help of the printer driver, and
"Remote UI Guide".
Menu Categories
There are the following six categories of the menu.
For the functions and operation procedures, see "Menu Functions and Menu
Operation," on p. 5-9.
For details on each menu, see "Chapter 6 Printing Environment Settings".
JOB Menu
SETUP Menu
Prints the job logs.
Specifies the printing environment
such as layout adjustment and
print quality setting.
UTILITY Menu
Prints information about the
current printer settings.
5
The Printing Environment
SELECT FEEDER Menu
Specifies whether to feed paper
from the paper cassette or multipurpose tray and the paper size
CANCEL JOB Menu
RESET Menu
Cancels the job currently being
received or processed.
Resets the printer or outputs
print data.
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation
You can enter each menu when the printer is in the following status.
O: The status that you can enter the menu
-: The status that you cannot enter the menu
When the printer is ready to print *1
When the printer
is online
When the printer
is offline
When an error is
occurring *2
*3
SETUP Menu
SELECT FEEDER Menu
*4
RESET Menu
Job Menu
-
-
UTILITY Menu
-
-
*1 The printer is ready to print when the
(Ready) indicator is on.
*2 An error is occurring in the printer when the
(Message) indicator is on.
*3 You cannot specify the settings in the USER MAIN. options when the printer is in the online status.
*4 You cannot specify the settings for FORM FEED.
5-4
Menu Functions
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to Use the Operation Keys
Use the following keys for the menu operation.
Among the keys, the
(Settings) key,
(Utility) key,
(Job) key,
(Reset)
key,
(Cancel Job) key, and (Feeder Selection) key have the function to display
a menu.
Display
JOB Menu
UTILITY Menu
5
SETUP Menu
The Printing Environment
RESET Menu
SELECT FEEDER Menu
CANCEL JOB Menu
■ The functions of each key are as follows.
Key
(Online)
Functions
Switches between online and offline. The printer is online when the
indicator under the key is on and is offline when the indicator is off.
Indicated as the
(Online) key in the manuals.
When the printer
is online
Immediately after
placing the printer
online
While the menu is
displayed*
(Cancel Job)
If pressed when the
(Job) indicator is
on or blinking (When data is being
processed or received), cancels the job
Does not function.
currently being processed. Indicated as
the
(Cancel Job) key in the manuals.
How to Use the Operation Keys
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5-5
Key
Functions
When the printer
is online
(Feeder
Selection)
(Utility)
The Printing Environment
5
(Job)
(Reset)
(Settings)
Immediately after
placing the printer
online
While the menu is
displayed*
Displays the SELECT FEEDER menu.
Indicated as the
(Feeder Selection)
key in the manuals.
Does not function.
Displays the
UTILITY menu.
Indicated as the
(Utility) key in the
manuals.
Does not function.
Displays the next left item in
the same hierarchy. When
the setting value is numeric,
reduces the value. If you
keep holding down the key,
the speed of the value
decreasing is increased
depending on the item.
Indicated as [ ] in the
manuals.
Displays the JOB
menu. Indicated as
the
(Job) key in
the manuals.
Does not function.
Displays the item of the next
upper hierarchy. Indicated as
[ ] in the manuals.
Displays the RESET menu. Indicated as
the
(Reset) key in the manuals.
Executes the selected item.
Otherwise, goes down the
hierarchy. Indicated as [ ] in
the manuals. Has the same
function as [OK].
Displays the SETUP menu. Indicated as
the
(Settings) key in the manuals.
However, the USER MAIN. options
cannot be specified when the printer is
online.
Displays the next right item in
the same hierarchy. When
the setting value is numeric,
increases the value. If you
keep holding down the key,
the speed of the value
increasing is increased
depending on the item.
Indicated as [ ] in the
manuals.
Does not function.
Executes the selected item.
Otherwise, goes down the
hierarchy. Indicated as [OK]
in the manuals. Has the
same function as [ ].
(OK)
* Depending on the settings, the printer may operate differently from the description. For more details, see the
instructions for each setting.
5-6
How to Use the Operation Keys
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to View the Display
This section describes the contents of the letters that appear in the display when
specifying the menu functions.
Menu Structure
The menu structure looks like a chain (loop structure), and one of the menus on this
chain is displayed in the display. Therefore, continuously pressing [ ] or [ ]
displays the first menu again.
The menus consist of individual loop structures in each hierarchy.
5
........
......
UFR
II SETU
P INITIALIZE MENU
........
...... . .
........
CONTROL MENU
The Printing Environment
Moves the menu from side to side
........
FEEDER MENU LAYOUT MENU......
How to View the Display
Up to 16 characters appear in a line in the display.
After you display a menu by pressing a key, the item of the first hierarchy in the
menu appears automatically.
If there is any selectable item in the same hierarchy, "➞" appears on the right in the
display.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
→
How to View the Display
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5-7
If no action is taken after the lowest hierarchy in the menu is displayed, the item of
the next upper hierarchy and that of the currently selected hierarchy are displayed
alternately.
POWER SAVE MODE
=PANEL OFF
→
"=" is displayed on the left in the display for the currently selected setting value.
The Printing Environment
5
5-8
How to View the Display
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
This section describes the overview of the menus and operating procedures for
them.
SETUP Menu
This section describes the function of the SETUP menu and the operating
procedure for it.
SETUP Menu Functions
Normally, you can configure a printing environment using an application or the
printer driver in a computer connected to the printer. However, some settings such
as interface configuration can be specified only in the SETUP menu of the printer.
Also, you can print using an application in which you cannot specify the print
settings or MS-DOS command directly. When you are printing using them, specify
the printing environment using the SETUP menu in the printer.
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "SETUP Menu Settings," on p. 6-11.
Operating Procedure for the SETUP Menu
The SETUP menu consists of three hierarchies: "Option", "Item", and "Setting
Value". Select the target options in each hierarchy.
As an example of the setting procedure, this section describes the procedure for
setting TRAY PAPER SIZE in the FEEDER MENU options to B5. Start the key
operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Place the printer offline.
Key Operation
Press the
(Online) key.
When the printer is online, the SETUP menu can
be displayed, however, the USER MAIN. options
cannot be specified.
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5-9
5
The Printing Environment
The SETUP menu allows you to configure a variety of printing environment such as
printing position, type of character set, and the selection of the interface for
connecting the printer to the computer.
2
Display the SETUP menu.
3
→
Select the option.
Press [
When the FEEDER MENU options are selected
The target option is displayed.
FEEDER MENU
4
5
] or [
].
→
Display the item.
Press [OK].
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
5
(Settings) key.
The SETUP menu is displayed.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
Press the
The selected item is displayed.
Select the item.
Press [
When TRAY PAPER SIZE is selected
The target item is displayed.
] or [
].
The Printing Environment
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
6
Display the setting value.
=A4
7
Press [OK].
The selected setting value is displayed.
→
Select the setting value.
Press [
When B5 is selected
The target setting value is displayed.
B5
] or [
].
→
8
Determine the selected setting value.
Press [OK].
9
Switch back to online state.
Press the
(Online) key.
NOTE
• The printer can switch back to online when it is ready to print. The printer is ready to print
when the
(Ready) indicator is on.
• If you press [ ] during the setting, the display goes back up the hierarchy.
• If you press the
(Online) key during the setting, the setting is canceled.
• In some options, the items are divided into two different hierarchies.
5-10
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
UTILITY Menu
This section describes the function of the UTILITY menu and the operating
procedure for it.
UTILITY Menu Functions
The UTILITY menu allows you to print the settings for the SETUP menu or perform
cleaning.
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "UTILITY Menu Settings," on p. 6-48.
Operating Procedure for the UTILITY Menu
The UTILITY menu consists of two hierarchies: "Common Utilities" and "Exclusive
Utilities". Select the target options in each hierarchy. Exclusive Utilities are
displayed only when PCL UTILITY is selected in the hierarchy of Common Utilities.
Operation Procedure
Key Operation
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press the
(Online) key.
2
Display the UTILITY menu.
Press the
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
3
→
Select the Common Utility.
Press [
When PCL UTILITY is selected
The target Common Utility is displayed.
PCL UTILITY
4
(Utility) key.
The UTILITY menu is displayed.
].
→
Display the Exclusive Utility
FONTS LIST
] or [
→
Press [OK].
The Exclusive Utility is displayed.
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5-11
5
The Printing Environment
This section describes the procedure for printing FONTS LIST in PCL UTILITY as
an example. Start the key operation from Step 1.
5
Select the Exclusive Utility.
Press [
When FONTS LIST is selected
The target Exclusive Utility is displayed.
FONTS LIST
6
] or [
].
→
Confirm the selected option.
Press [OK].
A fonts list is printed.
NOTE
• If you did not select the Exclusive Utility (PCL UTILITY), Step 4 to 5 are omitted.
• If you press [ ] during the setting, the display goes back up the hierarchy.
• If you press the
(Online) key during the setting, the setting is canceled.
JOB Menu
This section describes the function of the JOB menu and the operating procedure
for it.
5
The Printing Environment
JOB Menu Functions
The JOB menu allows you to print a variety of log lists.
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "JOB Menu Settings," on p. 6-50.
Operating Procedure for the JOB Menu
This section describes the procedure for printing JOB LOG LIST. Start the key
operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press the
(Online) key.
2
Display the JOB menu.
Press the
JOB LOG LIST
(Job) key.
The JOB menu is displayed.
JOB
5-12
Key Operation
→
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
Select the item that you want to print.
Press [
When JOB LOG LIST is selected
The target item is displayed.
JOB LOG LIST
4
] or [
].
→
Print JOB LOG LIST.
Press [OK].
JOB LOG LIST is printed.
NOTE
If you press the
(Online) key during the setting, the setting is canceled.
RESET Menu
This section describes the function of the RESET menu and the operating
procedure for it.
RESET Menu Functions
The RESET menu allows you to reset the printer (soft reset and hard reset) and
output any print data remaining in the printer memory.
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "RESET Menu Settings," on p. 6-51.
Operating Procedure for the RESET Menu
This section describes the procedure for executing SOFT RESET as an example.
Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Display the RESET menu.
2
Press the
(Reset) key.
The RESET menu is displayed.
RESET
SOFT RESET
Key Operation
→
Select the item that you want to execute.
Press [
When SOFT RESET is selected
The target item is displayed.
SOFT RESET
] or [
].
→
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5-13
The Printing Environment
5
3
Determine the selected item.
Press [OK].
A soft reset is performed.
NOTE
HARD RESET is displayed after you keep holding down [OK] 3 seconds or more when
SOFT RESET is displayed in the display.
CANCEL JOB Menu
This section describes the function of the CANCEL JOB menu and the operating
procedure for it.
CANCEL JOB Menu Functions
The CANCEL JOB menu allows you to cancel only the job currently being received
or processed.
Pressing the
(Cancel Job) key and [OK] on the control panel while the job you
want to cancel is being processed starts the cancel job process.
The Printing Environment
5
IMPORTANT
• Cancel the job while the printer is processing the data (While the
(Job) indicator is on
or blinking). No job is canceled by pressing the
(Cancel Job) key when the
(Job)
indicator is off.
• The data that has already been processed and is being printed (started to be fed) cannot
be canceled. In this case, the next print data may be canceled.
• When there is any print data sent from a printer driver other than that for this printer,
multiple data may be canceled.
NOTE
When canceling a job, you may not be able to cancel the job even if <03 CANCELING
JOB> is displayed.
Operating Procedure for the CANCEL JOB Menu
Pressing the
(Cancel Job) key and [OK] on the control panel while the job you
want to cancel is being processed displays <03 CANCELING JOB> starts the
cancel job process. Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Cancel the job while the job is being
processed.
CANCEL?
5-14
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Key Operation
Press the
(Cancel Job) key.
2
Execute the job cancel process.
03 CANCELING JOB
Press [OK].
Pressing [OK] starts the job cancel process.
When not executing the cancel job process, press
any key other than [OK]. After completing the job
cancel, the printer is ready to print.
SELECT FEEDER Menu
This section describes the function of the SELECT FEEDER menu and the
operating procedure for it.
SELECT FEEDER Menu Functions
The SELECT FEEDER menu allows you to select the paper source, paper size,
etc. After a paper source is selected, the corresponding
(Paper Source)
indicator comes on.
Operating Procedure for the SELECT FEEDER Menu
The SELECT FEEDER menu consists of two hierarchies: "Item" and "Setting
Value". Select the target items in each hierarchy.
As an example of the setting procedure, this section describes the procedure for
setting TRAY PAPER SIZE to B5. Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
1
Display the SELECT FEEDER menu.
PAPER SOURCE
2
Key Operation
Press the
(Feeder Selection) key.
The SELECT FEEDER menu is displayed.
→
Select the item.
Press [
When TRAY PAPER SIZE is selected
The target item is displayed.
] or [
].
TRAY PAPER SIZE→
3
Display the setting value.
=A4
Press [OK].
The selected setting value is displayed.
→
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5-15
5
The Printing Environment
NOTE
For more details on the settings, see "SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings," on p. 6-53.
4
Select the setting value.
Press [
When B5 is selected
The target setting value is displayed.
B5
5
→
Determine the selected setting value.
The Printing Environment
5
5-16
] or [
Menu Functions and Menu Operation
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Press [OK].
].
Initializing the SETUP Menu
Initialization of the SETUP menu resets the settings specified in the SETUP menu
to the default settings.
Initialize the menu by selecting INITIALIZE MENU in the hierarchy of "Options" in
the SETUP menu. Start the key operation from Step 1.
Operation Procedure
Display the SETUP menu.
(Settings) key.
The SETUP menu is displayed.
SETUP
5
CONTROL MENU
2
Press the
→
Select INITIALIZE MENU.
Press [
] or [
The Printing Environment
1
Key Operation
].
INITIALIZE MENU→
3
Initialize the SETUP menu.
OK?
4
Confirm the message, then initialize the
SETUP menu.
Press [OK].
A confirmation message is displayed.
Press [OK].
<INITIALIZING> is displayed during the
initialization. DONE is displayed after the
initialization is completed.
IMPORTANT
• If the message <INITIALIZE FAIL> appears when the initialization of the SETUP menu is
executed, the SETUP menu is not initialized.
• Do not turn the printer OFF during the initialization. The printer memory may be
damaged.
• Some settings do not become effective unless you cycle the power of the printer or
perform a hard reset after initializing the SETUP menu.
Initializing the SETUP Menu
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5-17
NOTE
• If you press the
(Online) key during the setting, the setting is canceled. However, you
cannot cancel the setting when <INITIALIZING> is displayed even if you press the
(Online) key.
• ADJ.START POS. in the USER MAIN. options and NETWORK MENU in the INTERFACE
MENU options in the SETUP menu cannot be initialized.
The Printing Environment
5
5-18
Initializing the SETUP Menu
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing Environment Settings
6
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the options that you can specify on the printer's control panel.
Setting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
UTILITY Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
JOB Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
RESET Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
SELECT FEEDER Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
SETUP Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
CONTROL MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
FEEDER MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
LAYOUT MENU Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
QUALITY MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
INTERFACE MENU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
PRINT MODE Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
USER MAIN. Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
PCL SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
UFR II SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
IMAGING SETUP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
UTILITY Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
JOB Menu Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
RESET Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Setting Items
SETUP Menu
■ CONTROL MENU Options
Item
Applicable
Page
POWER SAVE MODE
PANEL OFF*, DEEP SLEEP, OFF
p. 6-11
PWR SAVE IN ERR
ON*, OFF
p. 6-12
POWER SAVE TIME
15 minutes*, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 180
minutes, 5 minutes
p. 6-12
AUTO ERROR SKIP
OFF*, ON
p. 6-12
PANEL LANGUAGE
ENGLISH*, FRENCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN,
SPANISH
p. 6-13
SHOW WARNINGS
CASSETTE EMPTY: ON*, OFF
p. 6-13
PDL SELECT(PnP)
UFR II*, PCL5E, PCL6
p. 6-13
6
Printing Environment Settings
Setting Value
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
■ FEEDER MENU Options
Item
6-2
Setting Value
Applicable
Page
TRAY PAPER SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES,
CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, ENV.
ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV.
DL, ENV. ISO-B5, INDEX CARD, STMT, 16K,
A5, B5
p. 6-14
CASSETTE1 SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES,
CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, A5, B5
p. 6-15
CASSETTE2 SIZE*1
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES,
CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, A5, B5
p. 6-16
STD PAPER SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV.
COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV.
ISO-B5, INDEX CARD, STMT, 16K, A5, B5
p. 6-16
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
TRAY PRIORITY
OFF*, ON
p. 6-17
INVLDPAPER TRAY
OFF*, ON
p. 6-18
AUTO SELECTION
TRAY: ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 1: ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 2*1: ON*, OFF
p. 6-18
STD PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY
PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY PAPER 3,
TRANSPARENCIES, ENVELOPE, LABEL
p. 6-19
2-SIDED PRINT.
OFF*, ON
p. 6-19
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ LAYOUT MENU Options
Setting Value
Applicable
Page
COPIES
1 to 9999; 1*
p. 6-20
OFFSET Y
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
p. 6-20
OFFSET X
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
p. 6-20
BIND.LOCATION
LONG EDGE*, SHORT EDGE
p. 6-21
GUTTER
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
p. 6-22
ALT.METHOD
ON*, OFF
p. 6-23
6
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
■ QUALITY MENU Options
Item
Setting Value
Applicable
Page
IMGE REFINEMENT
ON*, OFF
p. 6-24
GRADATION LEVEL
STANDARD*, HIGH
p. 6-24
TONER SAVE
OFF*, ON
p. 6-25
DENSITY
1 to 16; 4*
p. 6-25
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-3
Printing Environment Settings
Item
HALFTONES
TEXT:
RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR
TONE, HIGH RESOL.
GRAPHICS:
COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL.,
RESOLUTION, GRADATION
IMAGE:
COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL.,
RESOLUTION, GRADATION
p. 6-26
QUALITY CHANGE
CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING
p. 6-26
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
■ INTERFACE MENU Options
Item
Setting Value
I/F CONNECTION
USB: ON*, OFF
NETWORK: ON*, OFF
p. 6-27
MODE TIMEOUT
OFF, 5 to 300 seconds; 15 seconds*
p. 6-27
Printing Environment Settings
6
6-4
Applicable
Page
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NETWORK MENU*1
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6
Printing Environment Settings
TCP/IP SETTINGS
IP V. 4 SETTING:
IP MODE.............................MANUAL*, AUTO
PROTOCOL*1:
DHCP ..........................................OFF*, ON
BOOTP ........................................OFF*, ON
RARP ..........................................OFF*, ON
IP SETTINGS:
IP ADDRESS.................................. 0.0.0.0*
SUBNET MASK.............................. 0.0.0.0*
GATEWAY ADDRESS .................... 0.0.0.0*
IP ADD.RANGE:
REJECT RX/PRT ........................OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.*1............. REJ IP 1 to 8
PERMIT RX/PRT.........................OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*1 .............PER IP 1 to 8
REJ SET/BROWSE.....................OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.*1............. REJ IP 1 to 8
PMT SET/BROWSE ....................OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*1 .............PER IP 1 to 8
DNS:
PRIMARY ADD. .............................. 0.0.0.0*
SECONDARY ADD......................... 0.0.0.0*
IP V. 6 SETTING:
IP V. 6 ..............................................OFF*, ON
p. 6-29
WINS:
OFF*, ON
ARP/PING:
ON*, OFF
FTP:
FTP PRINT .....................................ON*, OFF
FTP SETTINGS ..............................ON*, OFF
LPD PRINT:
ON*, OFF
RAW PRINT:
ON*, OFF
IPP PRINT:
ON*, OFF
WSD:
WSD PRINT....................................ON*, OFF
WSD BROWSING*1 ........................ON*, OFF
MULTICAST DISC. .........................ON*, OFF
HTTP:
ON*, OFF
RESPONSE:
ON*, OFF
MAC ADDRESS SET:
PERMIT RECEIVE .........................OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*1 ....PER.MAC ADD.1 to 50
6-5
Printing Environment Settings
6
APPLETALK
OFF*, ON
p. 6-33
SMB
SMB SERVER:
OFF*, ON
p. 6-33
SNMP V. 1
ON*, OFF
p. 6-34
SNMP V. 3 SET.
SNMP V. 3:
OFF*, ON
USER SETTING 1 to 5*1:
AUTH .PASSWORD
ENCRYPT.PASSWRD
p. 6-34
START WAIT TIME
0 to 300 seconds; 0 seconds*
p. 6-35
REMOTE UI SET.
REMOTE UI:
ON*, OFF
p. 6-35
AUTO DETECT:
ON*, OFF
COMM.MODE*1:
HALF DUPLEX*, FULL DUPLEX
ETHERNET DRIVER
ETHERNET TYPE*1:
10 BASE-T*, 100 BASE-TX
MAC ADDRESS:
(Display only)
p. 6-35
INIT.N/W SET.
p. 6-36
CONNECT.RECOG.
ON*, OFF
p. 6-36
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the settings for other items.
■ PRINT MODE Options
Item
MODE SELECTION
Setting Value
PCL*, IMAGING
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
6-6
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Applicable
Page
p. 6-36
■ USER MAIN. Options
Item
Applicable
Page
Setting Value
ADJ.START POS.
OFFSET Y(TRAY): -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X(TRAY): -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET Y(CASS1): -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X(CASS1): -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET Y(CASS2)*1: -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X(CASS2)*1: -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET Y(DUP.): -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X(DUP.): -5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
p. 6-37
RECVRY PRINTING
ON*, OFF
p. 6-38
CHK PAPER SIZE
OFF*, ON
p. 6-38
SUBSTITUTE SIZE
OFF*, ON
p. 6-39
SP.PRINT ADJ A
MODE 1*, MODE 2, MODE 3, MODE 4
p. 6-39
UPDATE FIRMWARE
-
p. 6-39
NETWORK
-
p. 6-40
6
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ PCL SETUP Options
Item
Setting Value
Applicable
Page
PAPER SAVE
OFF*, ON
p. 6-40
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT*, LANDSCAPE
p. 6-40
FONT NUMBER
0 to 54; 0*
p. 6-41
POINT SIZE*1
4.00 to 999.75 point; 12.00 point*
p. 6-41
PITCH*1
0.44 to 99.99 cpi; 10.00 cpi*
p. 6-41
FORM LINES
5 to 128 lines; 64 lines*
p. 6-41
SYMBOL SET
PC8*, ROMAN8, ROMAN9, ISOL1, ISOL2,
ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9, PC775, PC8DN, PC850,
PC852, PC858, PC8TK, PC1004, WINL1,
p. 6-42
WINL2, WINL5, WINBALT, DESKTOP, PSTEXT,
LEGAL, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,
ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, WIN 30, MCTEXT
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-7
Printing Environment Settings
USB
CUSTOM SIZE
DO NOT SET*, SET
p. 6-42
UNIT OF MEASURE*1
Millimeters*, Inches
p. 6-42
X DIMENSION*1
76.2 to 215.9 mm; 215.9 mm*
(3.00 to 8.50 inches; 8.50 inches*)
p. 6-42
Y DIMENSION*1
127.0 to 355.6 mm; 355.6 mm*
(5.00 to 14.00 inches; 14.00 inches*)
p. 6-43
APPEND CR TO LF
NO*, YES
p. 6-43
ENLRG A4 WIDTH
OFF*, ON
p. 6-44
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
■ UFR II SETUP Options
Item
PAPER SAVE
6
Setting Value
ON*, OFF
Applicable
Page
p. 6-45
Printing Environment Settings
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
■ IMAGING SETUP Options
Item
Setting Value
ORIENTATION
AUTO*, VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL
p. 6-45
ZOOM
OFF*, AUTO
p. 6-45
PRINT POSITION
AUTO*, CENTER, TOP LEFT
p. 6-46
SHOW WARNINGS
PRINT*, PANEL, OFF
p. 6-46
ENLRG PRT AREA
OFF*, ON
p. 6-47
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
6-8
Applicable
Page
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
UTILITY Menu
Item
Setting Value
CONFIG.PAGE
-
Applicable
Page
p. 6-48
PCL UTILITY
FONTS LIST
p. 6-48
CLEANING
A4, LTR
p. 6-48
NW STATUS PRINT
-
p. 6-49
PRNTPOSNPRINT
-
p. 6-49
DEVICE LOG LIST
-
p. 6-49
JOB Menu
Setting Value
Applicable
Page
JOB LOG LIST*1
-
p. 6-50
REPORTLOG LST*1
-
p. 6-50
*1 Displayed only when the jog log display is enabled in the [Job Log Display] page in the Remote UI.
RESET Menu
Item
Setting Value
Applicable
Page
SOFT RESET/HARD
RESET
-
p. 6-51
FORM FEED
-
p. 6-51
SHUT DOWN
-
p. 6-52
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-9
6
Printing Environment Settings
Item
SELECT FEEDER Menu
Item
Setting Value
Applicable
Page
PAPER SOURCE
AUTO*, CASSETTE 1, CASSETTE 2*1, TRAY
p. 6-53
TRAY PAPER SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES,
CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, ENV.
ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV.
DL, ENV. ISO-B5, INDEX CARD, STMT, 16K,
A5, B5
p. 6-54
CASSETTE1 SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES,
CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, A5, B5
p. 6-54
CASSETTE2 SIZE*1
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES,
CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, A5, B5
p. 6-54
2-SIDED PRINT.
OFF*, ON
p. 6-54
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
6
Printing Environment Settings
*1 May not be displayed depending on the availability of the optional accessories and other settings.
6-10
Setting Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
SETUP Menu Settings
CONTROL MENU Options
POWER SAVE MODE
PANEL OFF*, DEEP SLEEP, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should use Power Save Mode.
There are two types of Power Save Mode, and the type of the mode the printer
enters depends on the setting for this item.
*
Power Save Mode the Printer Can Enter
PANEL OFF
Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode) *
DEEP SLEEP
Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel Off mode)
Power Save Mode 2 (the Deep Sleep mode)
OFF
The printer does not enter Power Save Mode. *
6
Even if PANEL OFF or OFF is specified for this item, the printer enters Power Save Mode 2 (the Deep
Sleep mode) when [Deep Sleep] is executed in the Remote UI ([Device Manager] ➞ [Status] ➞
[Device Control] ➞ [Deep Sleep]).
Power Save Mode consumes less power during the sleep state. While the printer
is in Power Save Mode, the display on the control panel is off, and the following
indicators are on.
Power Save Mode Type
Indicator that Comes On
Power Save Mode 1
(the Panel Off mode)
When the printer is online:
(Ready) indicator, Power indicator
When the printer is offline:
(Message) indicator, Power indicator
Power Save Mode 2
(the Deep Sleep mode)
Power Indicator
NOTE
• For details on Power Save Mode, see "Power Saving (Power Save Mode)," on p.
3-2.
• You can specify whether the printer should enter Power Save Mode when an error
is occurring in the printer (when the
(Message) indicator is on, or the number in
the message blinks). (See PWR SAVE IN ERR: the next item)
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-11
Printing Environment Settings
Setting Value
PWR SAVE IN ERR
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should enter Power Save Mode when an error is
occurring in the printer (when the
(Message) indicator is on, or the number in
the message blinks).
If this item is set to ON, the printer enters Power Save Mode even when an error is
occurring in the printer.
If this item is set to OFF, the printer does not enter Power Save Mode when an
error is occurring in the printer.
POWER SAVE TIME
15 minutes*, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 180 minutes, 5 minutes
Specifies the time interval until the printer enters Power Save Mode 1 (the Panel
Off mode).
NOTE
If the printer is in any of the following status, the printer does not enter Power Save
Mode (the Panel Off mode) even when the specified time has elapsed.
- An error is occurring in the printer (when the
(Message) indicator is on, or the
number in the message blinks), and PWR SAVE IN ERR is set to OFF.
- During the printer's startup
Printing Environment Settings
6
AUTO ERROR SKIP
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should automatically use the function that, when an
error has occurred, releases the printer from the error temporarily (Error Skip) and
continues the job.
If OFF is specified, you need to skip the error by pressing the
(Online) key.
If ON is specified, the printer skips the error automatically without you pressing
the
(Online) key.
NOTE
• The Error Skip function is only for skipping an error temporarily. Therefore, the data
may not be printed properly.
• For the types of error from which the printer can be released temporarily, see
"Message List," on p. 8-26.
• If ON is specified for this item, the printer automatically skips all the errors it can
skip automatically even when multiple errors are occurring.
6-12
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PANEL LANGUAGE
ENGLISH*, FRENCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, SPANISH
Confirm the language that is displayed in the display.
SHOW WARNINGS
CASSETTE EMPTY .............ON*, OFF
A Warning status is a status in which the printer requires some remedy although
the job is not affected. When the printer is in this status, an indicator blinks.
This item allows you to specify whether an indicator should blink when the printer
is in the following Warning status.
CASSETTE
EMPTY
Status
When the paper cassette
has run out of paper
Indicator Blink
The
(Paper Source) indicator for
the paper source that has run out of
paper blinks.
6
NOTE
The printer prints when either ON or OFF is specified.
PDL SELECT(PnP)
UFR II, PCL5E, PCL6
●If you want to connect the printer and computer with a USB cable
The printer driver for this printer may be installed automatically when the USB
cable is connected.
You can select the type of the printer driver ("UFR II", "PCL5e", or "PCL6") to be
installed in this item at the time.
●If you want to connect the printer and computer with a LAN cable
If you are using Windows Vista, you can detect the printer automatically using the
WSD (Web Service on Devices) protocol.
You can select the type of the printer driver ("UFR II", "PCL5e", or "PCL6") to be
installed on the automatically detected printer in this item.
IMPORTANT
• When installing the printer driver manually, be sure to match the setting of this item
and the type of the printer driver to be installed. You cannot use printer drivers of a
different type.
• After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-13
Printing Environment Settings
Setting
FEEDER MENU Options
TRAY PAPER SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, ENV.
ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, INDEX CARD,
STMT, 16K, A5, B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
IMPORTANT
• When you change the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray frequently, it is
convenient if TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES. If TRAY PAPER SIZE is
set to MIXED SIZES, you do not need to specify the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE
each time you load different size paper. However, when specifying MIXED SIZES,
make sure that the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray matches the
paper size specified in the printer driver before printing. If they do not match, the
printer may stop printing, displaying the message <41 CHK PAPER SZE>, or a
paper jam may occur. Be sure to check if the paper size specified in the printer
driver matches the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray before using
the printer.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size
paper of its long edges 215.9 mm or less when TRAY PAPER SIZE is set to MIXED
SIZES, load the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing from
UFR II Printer Driver, load the paper in portrait orientation.
Printing Environment Settings
6
NOTE
• Select CUSTOM SIZE or CUSTOM SIZE R when you want to specify custom size
paper using application and print it. If a message that prompts you to change the
size of the paper appears during printing, press the
(Online) key to clear the
error before printing again.
• You cannot print on any area within 10 mm of the edges of an envelope. (If you
have selected the [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting Point] check box in
[Finishing Details] in UFR II Printer Driver, you can extend the printable area to
near the edges of the paper. For more details, see Help of UFR II Printer Driver.)
• You can obtain the same result by specifying the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE in
the SELECT FEEDER menu.
6-14
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CASSETTE1 SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, A5, B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette in the printer unit
(Cassette 1).
NOTE
• Select CUSTOM SIZE or CUSTOM SIZE R when you want to specify custom size
paper using application and print it. If a message that prompts you to change the
size of the paper appears during printing, press the
(Online) key to clear the
error before printing again.
• You can obtain the same result by specifying the setting for CASSETTE1 SIZE in
the SELECT FEEDER menu.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-15
6
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
• When you change the paper loaded in the paper cassette frequently, it is
convenient if you set CASSETTE1 SIZE to MIXED SIZES. When CASSETTE1
SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES, you do not need to specify the settings for
CASSETTE1 SIZE each time the different size paper is loaded. However, when
specifying MIXED SIZES, make sure that the size of the loaded paper matches the
paper size specified in the printer driver before printing. If they do not match, the
printer may stop printing, displaying the message <41 CHK PAPER SZE>, or a
paper jam may occur. Be sure to check if the paper size specified in the printer
driver matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette before using the
printer.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size
paper of its long edges 215.9 mm or less when CASSETTE1 SIZE is set to MIXED
SIZES, load the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing from
UFR II Printer Driver, load the paper in portrait orientation.
CASSETTE2 SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, A5, B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette of the paper feeder
(Cassette 2).
IMPORTANT
• When you change the paper loaded in the paper cassette frequently, it is
convenient if you set CASSETTE2 SIZE to MIXED SIZES. When CASSETTE2
SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES, you do not need to specify the settings for
CASSETTE2 SIZE each time the different size paper is loaded. However, when
specifying MIXED SIZES, make sure that the size of the loaded paper matches the
paper size specified in the printer driver before printing. If they do not match, the
printer may stop printing, displaying the message <41 CHK PAPER SZE>, or a
paper jam may occur. Be sure to check if the paper size specified in the printer
driver matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette before using the
printer.
• When printing custom size paper from UFR II Printer Driver, you can load the paper
either in portrait or landscape orientation. However, if you want to print custom size
paper of its long edges 215.9 mm or less when CASSETTE2 SIZE is set to MIXED
SIZES, load the paper in landscape orientation. When you are not printing from
UFR II Printer Driver, load the paper in portrait orientation.
Printing Environment Settings
6
NOTE
• Select CUSTOM SIZE or CUSTOM SIZE R when you want to specify custom size
paper using application and print it. If a message that prompts you to change the
size of the paper appears during printing, press the
(Online) key to clear the
error before printing again.
• You can obtain the same result by specifying the setting for CASSETTE2 SIZE in
the SELECT FEEDER menu.
• This item is displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
STD PAPER SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL,
ENV. ISO-B5, INDEX CARD, STMT, 16K, A5, B5
Specifies a standard paper size for when the printer cannot determine the size of
the paper to process, such as when using paper that you cannot specify its size in
an application.
IMPORTANT
When printing from Windows or Macintosh, specify the paper size in the printer
driver. When you want to print from a computer in which an operating system such
as MS-DOS and UNIX is used and cannot specify the paper size, specify the size
in this item.
6-16
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
TRAY PRIORITY
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should detect the paper source in order starting with
the multi-purpose tray when AUTO is specified in the SELECT FEEDER menu.
If OFF is specified, the printer detects if the size of the paper in a paper source
matches the paper size of the received data in the following order.
Cassette 1 ➞ Cassette 2 * 1➞ Multi-purpose Tray
If ON is specified, the printer detects if the size of the paper in a paper source
matches the paper size of the received data in the following order starting with the
multi-purpose tray.
Multi-purpose Tray ➞ Cassette 1 ➞ Cassette 2 * 1
*1: Only when the optional paper feeder is installed
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-17
6
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
• If INVLDPAPER TRAY (See the next item) is set to ON, the setting for this item is
ignored, and the printer detects the paper source starting with the paper cassette.
When paper that is the same size as the paper size of the received data is not
loaded in the selected paper source, the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose
tray.
• Specify the setting for automatic paper selection in PAPER SOURCE (See p. 6-53)
in the SELECT FEEDER menu.
• This item is effective only when PAPER SOURCE in the SELECT FEEDER menu
is set to AUTO.
• Even if ON is specified for this item, the printer does not feed paper from the
multi-purpose tray when the size of the paper in the multi-purpose tray is different
from the paper size of the received data. However, if INVLDPAPER TRAY (See the
next item) is set to ON, a message that prompts you to replace the paper in the
multi-purpose tray appears when the paper that is the same size as the paper size
of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper source.
• Even if ON is specified for this item, depending on the received data, paper may be
fed not from the multi-purpose tray but from the paper cassette when the
(Paper
Source) indicator for the paper cassette for the paper size of the received data is
on.
INVLDPAPER TRAY
OFF*, ON
Specifies what the printer does when paper that is the same size as the paper
size of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper source.
If OFF is specified, a message that prompts you to replace the paper in the paper
cassette appears, and the printer stops printing.
If ON is specified, the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray. If the size of
the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray is different from the paper size of the
received data, a message that prompts you to replace the paper in the
multi-purpose tray appears, and the printer stops printing. When no paper is
loaded in the multi-purpose tray, or the multi-purpose tray runs out of paper, a
message that informs you of the tray's paper-out condition appears, and the
printer stops printing.
NOTE
If ON is specified for this item, the settings for TRAY in AUTO SELECTION (See the
next item) and TRAY PRIORITY (See the previous item) are ignored, and the
printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray when paper that is the same size as
the paper size of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper source.
Printing Environment Settings
6
AUTO SELECTION
TRAY .................................... ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 1 ....................... ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 2*1 .................... ON*, OFF
*1 CASSETTE 2 is displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Specifies the paper source to be automatically selected when the automatic paper
selection is specified in the SELECT FEEDER menu. Specify the setting for the
multi-purpose tray and paper cassette individually.
If ON is specified, the printer selects the respective paper source as the paper
source to be automatically selected. If OFF is specified, the printer does not select
the respective paper source as the paper source to be automatically selected.
NOTE
• If INVLDPAPER TRAY (See the previous item) is set to ON, the setting for TRAY in
this item is ignored, and the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray when
paper that is the same size as the paper size of the received data is not loaded in
the selected paper source.
• Specify the setting for automatic paper selection in PAPER SOURCE (See p. 6-53)
in the SELECT FEEDER menu.
6-18
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
STD PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY
PAPER 3, TRANSPARENCIES, ENVELOPE, LABEL
Specifies the default paper type. This printer internally applies the optimum print
mode for the paper type specified in this item.
Each print mode supports the following paper types.
• PLAIN PAPER:
Plain Paper (60 - 89 g/m2)
• PLAIN PAPER L:
Specify when paper curls excessively on printing with PLAIN
PAPER selected.
• HEAVY PAPER 1: Heavy Paper (90 - 120 g/m2)
• HEAVY PAPER 2: Heavy Paper (121 - 163 g/m2)
• HEAVY PAPER 3: Specify when you want to improve the toner fixation on
printing with STD PAPER TYPE set to HEAVY PAPER 2.
• TRANSPARENCIES: Transparencies
• ENVELOPE: Envelopes
• LABEL: Labels
2-SIDED PRINT.
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should print on one side or both sides of the paper.
If ON is specified, the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
IMPORTANT
When printing from Windows or Macintosh, specify 2-sided printing in the printer
driver. When you want to print from a computer in which an operating system such
as MS-DOS and UNIX is used and cannot specify 2-sided printing, specify the
setting in this item.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-19
6
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
When printing from Windows or Macintosh, specify the paper type in the printer
driver. When you want to print from a computer in which an operating system such
as MS-DOS and UNIX is used and cannot specify the paper type, specify the paper
type in this item.
NOTE
• You can perform automatic 2-sided printing only on plain paper (60 to 89 g/m2) and
heavy paper (90 to 120 g/m2) at sizes of A4, Legal, and Letter. For more details,
see "Paper Requirements," on p. 4-2.
• When performing automatic 2-sided printing on paper with a logo, load the paper
as the following.
- When printing from the paper cassette, load the paper with the printing side of the
first page facing up.
- When printing from the multi-purpose tray, load the paper with the printing side of
the first page facing down.
• You can obtain the same result by setting 2-SIDED PRINT. in the SELECT
FEEDER menu.
LAYOUT MENU Options
COPIES
1 to 9999; 1*
Specifies the number of copies to be printed.
6
Printing Environment Settings
The printer prints the specified number of copies.
OFFSET Y/OFFSET X
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
Adjusts the printing position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction
(X) by the specified value.
The printing position changes as follows according to the increase and decrease
of the specified value.
OFFSET Y:
6-20
As the value increases, the gutter width in the Y direction
increases.
As the value decreases, the gutter width in the Y direction
decreases.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
OFFSET X:
As the value increases, the gutter width in the X direction
increases.
As the value decreases, the gutter width in the X direction
decreases.
Range adjusted by "OFFSET X"
X
Front
X
+ direction
Front
Range adjusted
by "OFFSET Y"
Adjust using
OFFSET X
and OFFSET Y
Back
Y
ABC
DEF
Original margin
Y
DEF
+ direction
ABC
Back
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the
printing position, the part will be missing in the print result.
BIND.LOCATION
LONG EDGE*, SHORT EDGE
Specifies which edge of the paper, the long edge or short edge, is to be bound.
When you want to bind paper on which 2-sided printing is performed, the printer
adjusts the binding location automatically according to the paper surface.
Specify the binding location (top/bottom/left/right) and its width in GUTTER (See
the next item).
If LONG EDGE is specified, the binding location is created on the long edge of the
paper.
2-sided printing in
portrait orientation
Front
2-sided printing in
landscape orientation
Back
Front
Back
Gutter
DEF
Gutter
Gutter
ABC
DEF
ABC
Gutter
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-21
6
Printing Environment Settings
NOTE
Each time you press [ ], the value increases in 0.5 mm increments, and each
time you press [ ], the value decreases in 0.5 mm increments. If you keep
holding down [ ] or [ ], the speed of the value changing is increased.
If SHORT EDGE is specified, the binding location is created on the short edge of
the paper.
2-sided printing in
portrait orientation
Front
Back
2-sided printing in
landscape orientation
Front
ABC
Gutter
DEF
ABC
Back
Gutter
Gutter
DEF
Gutter
NOTE
You cannot create a gutter only by specifying this item. A gutter can be created only
after specifying this item in combination with the setting for GUTTER.
GUTTER
-50.0 to 50.0; 0.0* (mm)
Specifies the gutter width for printing with the binding location created. A gutter is
created with the image shifted by the specified value. You can shift the image in
the "+" direction with a positive value and in the "–" direction with a negative value.
[0 mm]
+ direction
- direction
Center
Center
Center
Gutter
Gutter
Printing Environment Settings
6
Specify on which edge of the paper, the long edge or short edge, the gutter is to
be created in BIND.LOCATION (See the previous item). On which edge (top/
bottom/left/right) of the paper the gutter is created depends on the setting for
BIND.LOCATION and which value "+" or "-" is specified for this item.
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after creating a gutter,
the part will be missing in the print result.
NOTE
• Each time you press [ ], the value increases in 0.5 mm increments, and each
time you press [ ], the value decreases in 0.5 mm increments. If you keep
holding down [ ] or [ ], the speed of the value changing is increased.
6-22
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• If the settings for OFFSET Y and OFFSET X are specified at the same time as the
setting for this item is specified, the settings for OFFSET Y and OFFSET X are
processed first, and then the setting for this item is processed.
● Settings for BIND.LOCATION and GUTTER
Specify BIND.LOCATION and GUTTER referring to the following finishing
image.
DEF
BIND.LOCATION : SHORT EDGE
GUTTER : + direction
DEF
BIND.LOCATION : SHORT EDGE
GUTTER : - direction
ABCDE
FGHIJK
FGHIJK
6
Specify whether you print in portrait orientation or landscape orientation in an
application.
ALT.METHOD
ON*, OFF
Specifies the printing side of the last page on a job with odd number of pages
when 2-SIDED PRINT. (See p. 6-19) is set to ON.
The printing side of the last page varies depending on the setting for this item or
paper source as the following.
• When printing from the paper cassette
If ON is specified, the printer prints on the underside of the loaded paper.
If OFF is specified, the printer prints on the upper side of the loaded paper.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-23
Printing Environment Settings
ABC
BIND.LOCATION : LONG EDGE
GUTTER : - direction
FGHIJK
ABC
DEF
BIND.LOCATION : LONG EDGE
GUTTER : + direction
Back
(2-sided printing)
FGHIJK
ABC
DEF
Front
ABCDE
ABC
Back
(2-sided printing)
ABCDE
Front
Binding location for when using
paper in landscape orientation
ABCDE
Binding location for when using
paper in portrait orientation
• When printing from the multi-purpose tray
If ON is specified, the printer prints on the upper side of the loaded paper.
If OFF is specified, the printer prints on the underside of the loaded paper.
Specify OFF for this item when you want to match the setting of the orientation or
printing side for the last page with those for its previous page, such as when you
want to print previously printed paper etc. whose printing orientation or printing
side is fixed.
NOTE
This item is effective only when 2-SIDED PRINT. is set to ON.
QUALITY MENU Options
IMGE REFINEMENT
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should use Image Refinement that enables to print
jagged outlines of text or graphics smoothly.
If ON is specified, the printer prints using Image Refinement.
6
Printing Environment Settings
If OFF is specified, the printer prints without using Image Refinement.
NOTE
• The effect of Image Refinement varies depending on the pattern of text or graphics
(diagrams, charts, graphs, etc).
• If GRADATION LEVEL (See the next item) is set to HIGH, the setting for this item is
ignored, and the printer prints in the same way as when OFF is specified.
GRADATION LEVEL
STANDARD*, HIGH
Specifies the gradation level for data.
STANDARD is suitable to print thin lines or data of low resolution.
HIGH is suitable to print data of high resolution with complex gradations, such as
photographs and graded images. You print data more clearly than when
STANDARD is specified.
NOTE
If this item is set to HIGH, the setting for IMGE REFINEMENT (See the previous
item) is ignored even if ON is specified for it, and the printer prints in the same way
as when OFF is specified.
6-24
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
TONER SAVE
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether to use the toner save mode that is suitable for when printing a
proof sheet.
NOTE
If ON is specified for this item, print result may be faint and unclear. Parts to which
gradation is applied in very light gray may appear denser in color.
- When printing without using the
toner save mode
- When printing using the toner save
mode
Printing Environment Settings
6
DENSITY
1 to 16; 4*
Adjusts the print density for the print data. As the setting value increases, the print
density becomes denser.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-25
HALFTONES
TEXT ..............RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL.
GRAPHICS ....COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., RESOLUTION, GRADATION
IMAGE............COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., RESOLUTION, GRADATION
This setting specifies how to express halftones in black and white data.
Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are
expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called
halftone processing.
For example, using a pattern that sharpens character and line edges, or a pattern
that smoothens image and graph gradation, enables you to obtain the most
suitable texture.
If RESOLUTION is selected, you can print text with distinct outlines, which is best
to print text and thin lines.
If GRADATION is selected, you can print with both smooth gradation and outlines,
which is best to print graphs and graphics that use gradation.
If COLOR TONE is selected, you can print with sharp gradation and well-balanced
texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best for printing images.
6
Printing Environment Settings
If HIGH RESOL. is selected, finer printing can be done than with RESOLUTION,
although toner stability is somewhat weaker. This is suited to printing small
characters and fine lines, and outlines (such as from CAD data) sharply.
QUALITY CHANGE
CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING
Specifies whether the printer should continue printing with the image quality level
being lowered automatically or stop printing, displaying the following error
message when the memory required for the process runs out.
Error Message
<38 LOW IMGE QLTY>
Setting
When the printer receives a large amount of data or
complicated data, the memory required for the
process may run out, and the printer may print with
the image quality level being lowered automatically.
Specify whether the printer should display an error
message when the printer is in this status.
If CONT.PRINTING is specified, the printer prints with the image quality level
being lowered automatically without displaying a message.
6-26
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If STOP PRINTING is specified, the printer stops printing, displaying a message.
In this case, the printer resumes printing with the image quality level being
lowered by pressing the
(Online) key.
NOTE
When the message <38 LOW IMGE QLTY> appears frequently by specifying
STOP PRINTING for this item, perform the following procedure.
- If GRADATION LEVEL is set to HIGH, set it to STANDARD. If you do so, however,
the printer prints with the gradation level of the data being lowered.
INTERFACE MENU Options
I/F CONNECTION
USB ......................................ON*, OFF
NETWORK ...........................ON*, OFF
Specifies the settings for the interfaces used for communication with the
computer, etc.
Even if multiple interfaces are set to ON, the printer automatically switches to the
one that received the data first. Therefore, you do not need to change the setting
in the printer each time you connect the printer to different types of interfaces at
the same time.
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
MODE TIMEOUT
OFF, 5 to 300 seconds; 15 seconds*
Specifies the function to finish a job automatically.
If you specify the time the printer times out in this item, the printer can finish a job
automatically when the specified time has elapsed since no data is entered.
If this item is specified, the printer can output paper automatically when data is
remaining in the printer because of an application not sending the command to
output paper.
When OFF is specified, the printer does not use the function to finish a job
automatically.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-27
6
Printing Environment Settings
You can specify ON or OFF for each interface.
IMPORTANT
If the function to finish a job automatically is specified, the job may be finished in
the middle of the process when the computer takes a long time to process the data.
In this case, adjust the time the printer times out.
NOTE
• The
(Job) indicator on the control panel is on or blinking during a job.
• When the printer is offline, the printer does not use the function to finish a job
automatically.
Printing Environment Settings
6
6-28
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NETWORK MENU
■ TCP/IP SETTINGS
IP V. 4 SETTING
IP MODE.............................MANUAL*, AUTO
PROTOCOL*1
DHCP................................OFF*, ON
BOOTP .............................OFF*, ON
RARP................................OFF*, ON
IP SETTINGS
IP ADDRESS ....................0.0.0.0*
SUBNET MASK ................0.0.0.0*
GATEWAY ADDRESS ......0.0.0.0*
IP ADD.RANGE
REJECT RX/PRT..............OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.*2 ........REJ IP 1 to 8
PERMIT RX/PRT ..............OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*2 ........PER IP 1 to 8
REJ SET/BROWSE ..........OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.*2 ........REJ IP 1 to 8
PMT SET/BROWSE .........OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*2 ........PER IP 1 to 8
DNS
PRIMARY ADD. ................0.0.0.0*
SECONDARY ADD. ..........0.0.0.0*
IP V. 6 SETTING
IP V. 6..................................OFF*, ON
WINS ....................................OFF*, ON
ARP/PING.............................ON*, OFF
FTP
FTP PRINT .........................ON*, OFF
FTP SETTINGS ..................ON*, OFF
LPD PRINT ...........................ON*, OFF
RAW PRINT..........................ON*, OFF
WSD
WSD PRINT........................ON*, OFF
WSD BROWSING*3 ............ON*, OFF
MULTICAST DISC. .............ON*, OFF
HTTP ....................................ON*, OFF
RESPONSE..........................ON*, OFF
MAC ADDRESS SET
PERMIT RECEIVE .............OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.*2 ..........PER.MAC ADD.1 to 50
Printing Environment Settings
6
*1 PROTOCOL is displayed only when IP MODE is set to AUTO.
*2 REJECT ADD.SET. and PERMIT ADD.SET. are displayed only when REJECT RX/PRT, PERMIT RX/
PRT, REJ SET/BROWSE, PMT SET/BROWSE, or PERMIT RECEIVE is set to ON.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-29
*3 WSD BROWSING is displayed only when WSD PRINT is set to OFF.
Specifies the TCP/IP setting for the print server equipped with this printer.
Item
Setting
IP MODE
Select the method for setting the IP address.
- When specifying the IP address using any one of DHCP,
BOOTP, or RARP, select AUTO.
- When specifying the IP address to the printer directly, select
MANUAL.
PROTOCOL
If you have set IP MODE to AUTO, select which protocol you
want to use.
Set each of DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP to ON (use) or OFF (do
not use).
Specify the settings for IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and
GATEWAY ADDRESS.
IP SETTINGS
For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for
entering addresses" below the table.
Printing Environment Settings
6
6-30
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Setting
IP
ADD.RANGE
Restrict the users who can print or perform the printer settings
using IP addresses.
- To reject specific users from printing, set REJECT RX/PRT to
ON, and then specify the addresses to be rejected in REJECT
ADD.SET..
- To permit specific users to print, set PERMIT RX/PRT to ON,
and then specify the addresses to be permitted in PERMIT
ADD.SET..
- To reject specific users from changing the settings, set
REJECT ADD.SET. to ON, and then specify the addresses to
be rejected in REJECT ADD.SET..
- To permit specific users to change the settings, set PERMIT
ADD.SET. to ON, and then specify the addresses to be
permitted in PERMIT ADD.SET..
Enter addresses in REJECT ADD.SET. and PERMIT ADD.SET.
using the following procedure.
(This section describes the setting procedure taking REJECT
ADD.SET as an example. You can also apply this procedure to
the setting for PERMIT ADD.SET..)
a Select REJECT ADD.SET., then press [OK].
b Select REJ IP 1 START, then press [OK].
c Enter the IP address to be rejected, then press [OK].
For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for
entering addresses" below the table.
d If you enter an IP address in REJ IP 1 END, the IP addresses
between REJ IP 1 START and REJ IP 1 END are rejected.
For example, if you specify addresses as follows, 12
addresses between "192.168.0.200" and "192.168.0.211" are
rejected.
- Entering "192.168.0.200" for REJ IP 1 START
- Entering "192.168.0.211" for REJ IP 1 END
e If you want to enter other IP addresses to be rejected, enter
them starting from REJ IP 2 START.
You can enter up to eight addresses.
DNS
Specify the settings for PRIMARY ADD. and SECONDARY
ADD. for DNS.
For the method for entering the addresses, see "Method for
entering addresses" below the table.
* Specify the settings for [DNS Host Name], [DNS Domain
Name], and [DNS Dynamic Update] from the Remote UI. (See
Network Guide)
IP V. 6
SETTING
If you want to use IP v. 6, specify ON.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-31
6
Printing Environment Settings
Item
Item
Printing Environment Settings
6
6-32
Setting
WINS
If you want to use WINS Resolution, specify ON.
* Specify the settings for [WINS Server Address] and [Scope ID]
from the Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
ARP/PING
If you want to use the ARP/PING function, specify ON.
FTP
If you want to use FTP Print, set FTP PRINT to ON.
* Specify the settings for [FTP Print User Name] and [FTP Print
Password] from the Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
If you want to perform the settings using FTP Client, set FTP
SETTINGS to ON.
LPD PRINT
If you want to use LPD Print, specify ON.
* Specify the setting for [Print LPD Banner Page] from the
Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
RAW PRINT
If you want to use RAW Print, specify ON.
* Specify the setting for [Bidirectional Communication] from the
Remote UI. (See Network Guide)
IPP PRINT
If you want to use IPP Print, specify ON.
* Specify the settings for [IPP Authentication], [IPP User Name],
and [IPP Password] from the Remote UI. (See Network
Guide)
WSD
If you want to use WSD Print, set WSD PRINT to ON, and then
specify the following settings.
- If you want to obtain printer information using WSD, set WSD
BROWSING to ON.
If you set WSD PRINT to ON, WSD BROWSING is not
displayed. (WSD BROWSING is fixed at ON.)
- If you want to set the printer to respond to requests from
multicast discovery, set MULTICAST DISC. to ON.
HTTP
If you want to use the HTTP function, specify ON.
Specifying OFF disables the Remote UI and IPP Print.
RESPONSE
If you want to set the printer so that it responds to searches that
used the multicast discovery function, specify ON.
* Specify the setting for [Scope Name] from the Remote UI.
(See Network Guide)
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Item
MAC
ADDRESS
SET
Setting
Permits access only from users with a specific MAC address.
Set PERMIT RECEIVE to ON, and then specify the addresses
to be permitted in PERMIT ADD.SET..
Enter addresses in PERMIT ADD.SET. using the following
procedure.
a Select PERMIT ADD.SET., then press [OK].
b Select PER.MAC ADD.1 then press [OK].
c Enter the MAC address to be permitted, then press [OK].
d If you want to enter other MAC addresses to be permitted,
enter them starting from PER.MAC ADD.2.
You can enter up to 50 addresses.
"Method for entering addresses"
1. Move the cursor to each field (an area separated by periods to enter three-digit
numbers) in which you want to enter the address, by pressing [ ] or [ ] (The
number in the field blinks, allowing you to enter a value.).
2. Enter the numbers ([ ] increases the value and [ ] decreases the value.).
3. After entering values in all the fields, press [OK] to confirm the settings.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ APPLETALK
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should use AppleTalk.
NOTE
• For more details on AppleTalk, see "Chapter 6 Using the Printer on an AppleTalk
Network (Macintosh)" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ SMB
SMB SERVER ......................OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should use the SMB protocol.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-33
6
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
After changing the settings for this item, cycle the power of the printer or perform a
hard reset to make the settings effective.
■ SNMP V. 1
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should use the SNMP v. 1 protocol.
NOTE
• For more details on SNMP v. 1, see "Chapter 2 Common Network Settings" in
Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ SNMP V. 3 SET.
SNMP V. 3 ............................ OFF*, ON
USER SETTING 1 to 5*1
AUTH .PASSWORD
ENCRYPT.PASSWRD
*1 USER SETTING 1 to 5 is displayed only when SNMP V. 3 is set to ON.
Specify the settings related to SNMP v. 3 protocol.
If you want to specify or change user information (authentication password and
encryption password) to be used in the SNMP v. 3 protocol, perform the following
procedure.
Printing Environment Settings
6
1. Select USER SETTING N (N = 1 to 5) using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
2. Confirm the user name*, then press [OK].
* "initial" (the default value) or the user name specified in the Remote UI is displayed.
3. Select AUTH .PASSWORD or ENCRYPT.PASSWRD using [
] and [
], then press
[OK].
4. Enter the password, then press [OK].
Input Method:
- Enter the password of 6 to 16 characters by pressing [ ] and [ ].
- Move the cursor to each field in which you want to enter a value by pressing [
] and
[
] (The cursor blinks, allowing you to enter a value.).
- If you press the
(Feeder Selection) key, a space for entering a character is created
at the cursor position.
- If you press the
(Cancel Job) key, the character at the cursor position is deleted.
NOTE
• For more details on SNMP v. 3, see "Chapter3 Using the Printer on a TCP/IP
Network (Windows/UNIX)" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
6-34
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ START WAIT TIME
0 to 300 seconds; 0 seconds*
Specifies the time interval from when the printer is turned ON to when the protocol
starts.
NOTE
• For more details on startup waiting time, see "Chapter 2 Common Network
Settings" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
■ REMOTE UI SET.
REMOTE UI ..........................ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer should use the Remote UI.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
AUTO DETECT.....................ON*, OFF
COMM.MODE*1....................HALF DUPLEX*, FULL DUPLEX
ETHERNET TYPE*1 .............10 BASE-T*, 100 BASE-TX
MAC ADDRESS....................(Display only)
*1 COMM.MODE and ETHERNET TYPE are displayed only when AUTO DETECT is set to OFF.
Configures the Ethernet driver.
NOTE
• For more details on configuring the Ethernet driver, see "Chapter 2 Common
Network Settings" in Network Guide.
• This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-35
Printing Environment Settings
6
■ ETHERNET DRIVER
■ INIT.N/W SET.
By the initialization in this item, you can reset the network settings to the default
settings.
The network settings can be initialized using the following procedure.
1. Press the
(Settings) key.
2. Select INTERFACE MENU using [
3. Select NETWORK MENU using [
4. Select INIT.N/W SET. using [
] and [
] and [
] and [
], then press [OK].
], then press [OK].
], then press [OK].
5. <OK?> is displayed. The initialization starts by pressing [OK].
* If you press the
(Online) key without pressing [OK], the printer does not initialize the settings but
becomes ready to print.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when NETWORK in the I/F CONNECTION options is
set to ON.
CONNECT.RECOG.
Printing Environment Settings
6
ON*, OFF
When you print using a network, you may not obtain proper printout results
(Unreadable characters are printed, etc.). In this case, specify OFF for this item.
PRINT MODE Options
MODE SELECTION
PCL*, IMAGING
Specifies the mode in which this printer operates when you print without using the
printer driver for this printer.
If the print mode is not appropriate, such a printing problem as unreadable
characters being printed may occur. Specify this item according to the data to be
printed.
NOTE
The IMAGING mode is used for the direct print function.
6-36
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
USER MAIN. Options
ADJ.START POS.
OFFSET Y(TRAY) .................-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X(TRAY).................-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET Y(CASS1) ..............-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X(CASS1) ..............-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET Y(CASS2)*1 ...........-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X(CASS2)*1 ...........-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET Y(DUP.) ..................-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
OFFSET X(DUP.)..................-5.0 to 5.0; 0.0* (mm)
*1 OFFSET Y(CASS2) and OFFSET X(CASS2) are displayed only when the optional paper feeder is
installed.
Specifies the printing position of the paper in the specified paper source. Adjusts
the position in the vertical direction (Y) or the horizontal direction (X) by the
specified value.
The setting values are indicated in millimeters (mm), and you can adjust the
position in 0.1 mm increments using [ ] and [ ].
OFFSET Y(DUP.) and OFFSET X(DUP.) allow you to specify the printing position
of the first page of 2-sided printing. The second page of 2-sided printing follows
the settings for each paper source.
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the
printing position, the part will be missing in the print result.
NOTE
• Each time you press [ ], the value increases in 0.1 mm increments, and each
time you press [ ], the value decreases in 0.1 mm increments.
• You can check the adjusted printing position in PRNTPOSNPRINT (See p. 6-49) in
the UTILITY menu.
• For adjusting the printing position, see "Adjusting the Printing Position," on p. 7-22.
• Be aware that, when adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, the
orientation of the images on the reverse pages varies depending on the printing
orientation or setting for BIND.LOCATION (See p. 6-21).
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-37
Printing Environment Settings
6
If you do not adjust the printing position, specify "0.0" for this item.
RECVRY PRINTING
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether to print the partially printed page when the printer stops printing
due to a paper jam or an error occurring.
If ON is specified for this item, the printer prints from the page in which a paper
jam or error occurred.
If OFF is specified for this item, the printer does not print from the partially printed
page but prints from the next page when a paper jam or error has occurred.
When the printer is performing 2-sided printing, it does not print the reverse page
of the partially printed page. The printing starts from the front side of the next
sheet.
CHK PAPER SIZE
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should stop printing, displaying the message <41
CHK PAPER SZE> or continue printing when TRAY PAPER SIZE, CASSETTE1
SIZE, or CASSETTE2 SIZE is set to MIXED SIZES.
Printing Environment Settings
6
If OFF is specified, the printer may stop printing, displaying <41 CHK PAPER
SZE>, when the paper size specified in the application is different from the size of
the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray or paper cassette. The paper on which
the error occurred is output automatically. You can also continue printing by
pressing the
(Online) key. However, the data may not be printed properly, or a
paper jam may occur.
If ON is specified, the printer prints without performing a print check even when
the paper size specified in the application is different from the size of the paper
loaded in the multi-purpose tray or paper cassette. However, the printing speed
may drop. Also, because the paper is printed at the paper size specified in the
application, blank areas may appear on the printed paper or part of the images
may be missing when the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray or
paper cassette is different from the paper size specified in the application.
IMPORTANT
For automatic 2-sided printing, <41 CHK PAPER SZE> always appears and the
printer stops printing regardless of the setting for this item.
6-38
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
SUBSTITUTE SIZE
OFF*, ON
When the paper cassette for the paper size to be used is not set in the printer, the
printer switches the paper source to the following paper cassettes and prints.
Printer Driver Setting
Size of the Paper to Be Printed
A4
➞
Letter
Letter
➞
A4
If ON is specified, the printer switches the paper size.
If OFF is specified, the printer does not switch the paper size but stops printing,
displaying an error message.
NOTE
Even if ON is specified, the printer does not switch the paper size when the paper
source for the paper size is empty.
SP.PRINT ADJ A
Depending on the paper type or the operating environment, vertical streaks may
appear on the printed paper.
In this case, specify MODE 2 for this item.
If the problem is not solved by specifying MODE 2, specify MODE 3.
If the problem is not solved by specifying MODE 3, specify MODE 4.
IMPORTANT
• Resetting the setting to MODE 1 due to change in paper type or operating
environment may also avoid vertical streaks appearing on the printed paper.
In this case, specify MODE 1.
• Vertical streaks are alleviated by specifying MODE 2, MODE 3, or MODE 4.
However, this decreases print density compared to when MODE 1 is specified.
This may also make outlines appear to be blurred or slightly jagged.
UPDATE FIRMWARE
■ USB
This item is to be executed only when the firmware of the printer needs to be
updated.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-39
Printing Environment Settings
6
MODE 1*, MODE 2, MODE 3, MODE 4
■ NETWORK
This item is to be executed only when the firmware of the printer needs to be
updated.
PCL SETUP Options
PAPER SAVE
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page that can be created due to
no data existing between two Form Feed codes sent from an application.
If ON is specified, the printer does not output the blank page. If OFF is specified,
the printer outputs the blank page.
If you use this function, you can save paper because the blank pages are not
output.
6
Printing Environment Settings
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT*, LANDSCAPE
Enables you to set the paper orientation.
If PORTRAIT is selected, the print image is printed in portrait orientation
regardless of the orientation of the paper in the paper cassette.
When loading paper in
landscape orientation
ABCDE
ABCDE
Feeding direction
6-40
When loading paper in
portrait orientation
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If LANDSCAPE is selected, the print image is printed in landscape orientation
regardless of the orientation of the paper in the paper cassette.
When loading paper in
landscape orientation
When loading paper in
portrait orientation
ABCDE
Feeding direction
ABCDE
FONT NUMBER
0 to 54; 0*
Eables you to set the default font typeface for this printer function using the
corresponding font numbers. Valid font numbers are from 0 to 54.
POINT SIZE
4.00 to 999.75 point; 12.00 point*
PITCH
0.44 to 99.99 cpi; 10.00 cpi*
If the number selected in FONT NUMBER is that of a fixed pitch scalable font,
Pitch appears in the PCL SETUP options. It enables you to specify the pitch for
the default font. The pitch can be adjusted in increments of 0.01 cpi (characters
per inch).
FORM LINES
5 to 128 lines; 64 lines*
Enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page. You can
specify from 5 to 128 lines.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-41
Printing Environment Settings
6
If the number selected in FONT NUMBER is that of a proportionally spaced
scalable font, this option appears in the PCL SETUP options. It enables you to
specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in
increments of 0.25 pts.
SYMBOL SET
PC8*, ROMAN8, ROMAN9, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9, PC775,
PC8DN, PC850, PC852, PC858, PC8TK, PC1004, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5,
WINBALT, DESKTOP, PSTEXT, LEGAL, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,
ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, WIN 30, MCTEXT
Enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host
computer.
CUSTOM SIZE
DO NOT SET*, SET
Enables you to specify a custom paper size. If SET is selected, you can enter a
custom size.
NOTE
You can only select the custom paper size entered with settings from the printer
driver.
6
Printing Environment Settings
UNIT OF MEASURE
Millimeters*, Inches
Enables you to specify the unit of measurement you would like to use to specify
your custom paper size.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when CUSTOM SIZE is set to SET.
X DIMENSION
76.2 to 215.9 mm; 215.9 mm*(3.00 to 8.50 inches; 8.50 inches*)
Enables you to specify the X dimension of the custom paper. The X dimension
can be adjusted between 76.2 mm (3.00") and 215.9 mm (8.50") in increments of
0.1 mm (0.01").
This function can be very useful when part of the printed image is cut off.
Increasing this dimension may allow some of the missing text to be correctly
printed. Make sure you do not increase the X dimension beyond the actual size of
the paper you are using for printing.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when CUSTOM SIZE is set to SET.
6-42
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Y DIMENSION
127.0 to 355.6 mm; 355.6 mm*(5.00 to 14.00 inches; 14.00 inches*)
Enables you to specify the Y dimension of the custom paper. The Y dimension can
be adjusted between 127.0 mm (5.00") and 355.6 mm (14.00") in increments of
0.1 mm (0.01").
This function can be very useful when part of the printed image is cut off.
Increasing this dimension may allow some of the missing text to be correctly
printed. Make sure you do not increase the Y dimension beyond the actual size of
the paper you are using for printing.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when CUSTOM SIZE is set to SET.
APPEND CR TO LF
NO*, YES
If YES is selected, the print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line
feed code is received.
If NO is selected, the print head moves down to the next line when line feed code
is received, and the margin does not change (such as to the beginning of the next
line).
ABCDE ↓ FGHIJ
LF code ( ↓ ) only
ABCDE
FGHIJ
Append CR to LF 'YES'
ABCDE
FGHIJ
Append CR to LF 'NO'
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-43
6
Printing Environment Settings
Enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed
code (LF) is received.
ENLRG A4 WIDTH
OFF*, ON
Determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter
size in width.
If ON is selected, all the area on a page 4.23 mm (1/6") from the top and bottom
edges and 3.39 mm (1/8") from the left and right edges is available for printing on
A4 paper. Only the width increases.
If OFF is selected, all the area on a page 4.23 mm (1/6") from the top, bottom, left,
and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.
C
C
D
D
A
6
A
B
B
Printing Environment Settings
D
D
'On'
C
'Off'
C
Printable area
Settings
A: Length
ON
OFF
288.54 mm (11 1/3")
B: Width
203.22 mm (8")
201.54 mm (7 7/8")
C: Left and right edges
3.39 mm (1/8")
4.23 mm (1/6")
D: Top and bottom edges
4.23 mm (1/6")
NOTE
• This setting is applicable for A4 paper only.
• This setting is applicable for portrait orientation only.
6-44
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
UFR II SETUP Options
PAPER SAVE
ON*, OFF
Specifies whether the printer outputs the blank page that can be created due to
no data existing in the page data sent from an application.
If ON is specified, the printer does not output the blank page. If OFF is specified,
the printer outputs the blank page.
If you use this function, you can save paper because the blank pages are not
output.
IMAGING SETUP Options
ORIENTATION
AUTO*, VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL
If AUTO is specified, the printer compares the width and height of the image in
TIFF format or JPEG format. If the width is larger, the image is printed in
landscape orientation. If the height is larger, the image is printed in portrait
orientation.
If VERTICAL is specified, the image is printed in portrait orientation regardless of
the ratio of width to height of the image.
If HORIZONTAL is specified, the image is printed in landscape orientation
regardless of the ratio of width to height of the image.
ZOOM
OFF*, AUTO
Specifies whether the printer should print with scaling outputs according to the
printable area.
If AUTO is specified, the printer prints the image with its size reduced to fit within
the printable area when the image size is larger than the printable area. Also,
when the image size is smaller than the printable area, the printer prints the
image with its size expanded to the margins of the printable area.
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-45
Printing Environment Settings
6
Specifies whether the printer should print an image in portrait (vertical) orientation
or in landscape (horizontal) orientation.
IMPORTANT
• Even if OFF is specified, the printer automatically reduces the image size to make
it fit within the printable area of the paper size when the image size is larger than
the output size.
• If AUTO is specified, printing positions specified by tags in TIFF data are ignored.
NOTE
This item scales an image size with the ratio of height to width fixed.
PRINT POSITION
AUTO*, CENTER, TOP LEFT
Specifies the printing position for an image.
If AUTO is specified, and if the data to be printed is in TIFF format in which the
printing position is specified, the image is printed on the specified position. If a
printing position is not specified, the image is printed in the center of the paper.
If CENTER is specified, the image is printed in the center of the paper even if the
data to be printed is in TIFF format in which the printing position is specified.
If TOP LEFT is specified, the image is printed on the upper-left of the paper even
if the data to be printed is in TIFF format in which the printing position is specified.
Printing Environment Settings
6
IMPORTANT
You cannot specify a printing position for data in JPEG format. If AUTO is specified,
the image is printed in the center of the paper.
SHOW WARNINGS
PRINT*, PANEL, OFF
Specifies the display setting for the error message in case of an error occurring.
If PRINT is specified, the printer prints the content of the error and exits the job.
If PANEL is specified, the error message appears in the display, and the printer
stops printing.
If OFF is specified, the printer exits the job without displaying anything even if an
error occurs.
NOTE
The error messages of which the display settings can be changed with this item are
<D9 IMG.DATA ERR> and <D9 IMG.REFER.ERR>.
6-46
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
ENLRG PRT AREA
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should print a document with its printable area
expanded.
If ON is specified, the margins of 0 mm are applied to all sides of the paper,
making the printable area expanded to the edges of the paper.
If OFF is specified, data cannot be printed within 5 mm margins on all sides of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
If ON is specified, the edges of the printout may be partly missing.
Printing Environment Settings
6
SETUP Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-47
UTILITY Menu Settings
NOTE
For the output samples of CONFIG.PAGE, NW STATUS PRINT, and PRNTPOSNPRINT,
see "The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode," on p. 10-2. For the output
sample of the PCL fonts list, see "The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print
Mode," on p. 10-5.
CONFIG.PAGE
Prints the capacity of the built-in memory (RAM) or the contents specified in the
SETUP menu. You can select this item regardless of the setting for the print mode.
NOTE
CONFIG.PAGE is designed to be printed on A4 size paper. Load a sheet of A4 size
paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Printing Environment Settings
6
PCL UTILITY
FONTS LIST
Prints internal information of the printer in the PCL mode.
FONTS LIST
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL mode is printed.
CLEANING
A4, LTR
The printer cleans the fixing roller by printing a cleaning page.
You can select paper of "A4" size or "LTR" size for printing a cleaning page.
If CLEANING is executed, <CLEANING PAPER> is displayed. Load a sheet of
A4/Letter size paper in the multi-purpose tray, then press the
(Online) key.
A cleaning paper is printed. Load the cleaning paper with the printed side facing
up in the multi-purpose tray, then press the
(Online) key. The loaded cleaning
paper is fed, cleaning inside fixing roller.
6-48
UTILITY Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE
For details on cleaning the fixing roller see "Cleaning the Fixing Roller," on p. 7-19.
NW STATUS PRINT
Prints the version number and the settings of the print server equipped with this
printer.
PRNTPOSNPRINT
The printing position adjusted in ADJ.START POS. (See p. 6-37) is printed. Check
the printout results to confirm the setting for ADJ.START POS.
NOTE
For adjusting the printing position, see "Adjusting the Printing Position," on p. 7-22.
DEVICE LOG LIST
6
Printing Environment Settings
Prints logs for error messages or service calls. Also, if a paper jam occurs, its
occurrence time is printed.
UTILITY Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-49
JOB Menu Settings
JOB LOG LIST
Prints the job logs printed from the computer.
File names and print dates are printed on the job log list.
NOTE
• If the printer has no job log, nothing is printed.
• Up to 48 job logs are printed on the job log list.
• This item is displayed only when it is specified, in the [Job Log Display] page in the
Remote UI, so that job logs are to be displayed.
REPORTLOG LST
6
Printing Environment Settings
Prints the job logs of the printed CONFIG.PAGE or NW STATUS PRINT.
Print dates, etc are printed on the report log list.
NOTE
• If the printer has no job log, nothing is printed.
• Up to 16 job logs are printed on the report log list.
• This item is displayed only when it is specified, in the [Job Log Display] page in the
Remote UI, so that job logs are to be displayed.
6-50
JOB Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
RESET Menu Settings
SOFT RESET/HARD RESET
Resets the printer when a problem has occurred or you want to cancel printing.
If you perform a soft reset, the printer stops the current process and deletes the
jobs in the printer memory, received print data, and the job being processed. If
you perform a hard reset, the printer cancels all the process and deletes the jobs.
To perform a soft reset, select SOFT RESET in the RESET menu, and then press
[OK].
To perform a hard reset, select SOFT RESET in the RESET menu, hold down
[OK] for 3 seconds or more to display HARD RESET, and then release the button.
FORM FEED
When a job is canceled from the computer or the data is less than one page, the
data may remain in the printer memory, and the job may not be completed
properly. As long as the printer remains in this status, you cannot print the next job
because the printer cannot receive the next data. In this case, force the printer to
output the print data using the procedure for this item.
IMPORTANT
• Print data from PCL/UFR II Printer Driver cannot be output.
• If you have output data, the data being printed is deleted. Print the data from the
computer again.
RESET Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-51
6
Printing Environment Settings
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to cancel printing from the computer before performing a soft reset.
• When the soft reset or hard reset is performed, the data being printed and the data
being received by all the interfaces is deleted. Therefore, perform printing from the
computer again as needed.
• If you perform a soft reset or hard reset, the data that has been already sent to the
memory are all deleted even if it is the data of other interface. If you are using the
printer on a network, be careful so that this operation does not affect the data from
other computers when resetting the printer.
• If you perform a hard reset while the printer is receiving data, the data that has not
yet been sent to the memory will be sent after the reset. However, the data may not
be printed properly.
NOTE
• The
(Job) indicator is on when any print data remains in the printer memory or
when no print data remains in the printer but a job has not yet been completed.
• If MODE TIMEOUT for a job is specified, data less than one page is also output
automatically when the specified time has elapsed (Data from PCL/UFR II Printer
Driver is not output.). MODE TIMEOUT for a job is set to 15 seconds in the default
settings.
• If the
(Job) indicator does not go off even after outputting the data, perform a
soft reset. (See the previous item)
SHUT DOWN
It is recommended that you shut down the printer using the following procedure
when you want to turn the printer OFF.
1. Press the
(Reset) key.
2. Display SHUT DOWN in the RESET menu, then press [OK].
3. <OK?> is displayed. Press [OK].
4. When the message <TURN OFF POWER> appears, press "O" of the power switch.
6
Printing Environment Settings
After executing a shutdown, the printer cannot receive data, and panel operation
is disabled. Cycle the power of the printer if you want to print the data again.
NOTE
If you are using WSD, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is turned
OFF.
6-52
RESET Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings
PAPER SOURCE
AUTO*, CASSETTE 1, CASSETTE 2*1, TRAY
*1 CASSETTE 2 is displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Selects the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray from which the printer feed
paper. After a paper source is selected, the corresponding
(Paper Source)
indicator comes on.
Multi-purpose tray
Cassette 1
Cassette2*
*Optional
IMPORTANT
When any paper is in the multi-purpose tray, you cannot feed paper from the paper
cassette. If you are printing from the paper cassette, remove any paper loaded in
the multi-purpose tray.
NOTE
• The installed paper cassettes and multi-purpose tray usually become the target
paper source when the printer feeds paper automatically. However, you can except
them from the target paper source.
• If paper of the same size is loaded in 2 or more paper sources when the paper
source setting is specified to be selected automatically, paper is fed from the upper
paper source regardless of the status of the
(Paper Source) indicators. When
the paper source runs out of paper, the paper source switches to other one in
which paper of the same size is loaded.
• If INVLDPAPER TRAY (See p. 6-18) is set to ON, the setting for this item is ignored,
and the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray when paper that is the
same size as the paper size of the received data is not loaded in the selected paper
source.
• When feeding paper from the multi-purpose tray, you need to specify the size of the
loaded paper previously. The default value is "A4".
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6-53
Printing Environment Settings
6
TRAY PAPER SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, ENV.
ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, INDEX CARD,
STMT, 16K, A5, B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
You can obtain the same result by specifying the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE in
the FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see "TRAY
PAPER SIZE," on p. 6-14.
CASSETTE1 SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, A5, B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette in the printer unit
(Cassette 1).
You can specify the same setting in CASSETTE1 SIZE in the FEEDER MENU
options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see "CASSETTE1 SIZE," on p.
6-15.
6
Printing Environment Settings
CASSETTE2 SIZE
A4*, LTR, LGL, EXEC, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, A5, B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette of the paper feeder
(Cassette 2).
You can specify the same setting in CASSETTE2 SIZE in the FEEDER MENU
options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see "CASSETTE2 SIZE," on p.
6-16.
NOTE
This item is displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
2-SIDED PRINT.
OFF*, ON
Specifies whether the printer should print on one side or both sides of the paper.
You can specify the same setting in 2-SIDED PRINT. in the FEEDER MENU
options in the SETUP menu. For more details, see "2-SIDED PRINT.," on p. 6-19.
6-54
SELECT FEEDER Menu Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Routine Maintenance
7
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the procedures for maintaining the printer such as replacing the
cartridges and cleaning the printer.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Precautions on Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Storing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Adjusting the Print Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Cleaning the Fixing Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Checking the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Adjusting the Printing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Moving the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Handling the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
This section describes how to replace or handle the toner cartridges and
precautions on storing them.
Contact the store where you purchased the printer to obtain replacement toner
cartridges.
IMPORTANT
No message appears in the display even if the toner cartridge is nearing the end of its
life. The case where white streaks appear on printed paper in longitudinal direction, or
printed paper comes out faint or uneven can be used to estimate when the toner
cartridge will need to be replaced. When you are replacing the toner cartridge, be sure to
use a toner cartridge designed for this printer.
NOTE
• Two types of toner cartridge that have different lifetime (Canon Genuine Cartridges) are
available for this printer.
• The lifetime of the toner cartridges (Canon Genuine Cartridges) designed for this printer
is approximately 3,000 pages or 7,000 pages. The page counts are on the basis of "ISO/
IEC 19752"* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting. The level
of toner consumption varies depending on the type of documents printed. If your average
document contains a lot of diagrams, charts, or graphs, the life of the toner cartridge will
be shorter as they consume more toner.
Routine Maintenance
7
* "ISO/IEC 19752" is the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for
monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that may contain printer
components" issued by ISO (International Organization for Standardization).
• This section describes the procedure, taking the toner cartridge with its lifetime of
approximately 3,000 pages (Canon Genuine Cartridges) as an example.
Precautions on Replacing the Toner Cartridge
WARNING
Do not throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the
toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
7-2
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
• Dispose of the packing materials according to local regulations.
• Be sure to use only the toner cartridges designed for this printer.
NOTE
• For details on handling toner cartridges, see "Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges,"
on p. 7-14.
• The packing materials may be changed in form or position to be placed, or may be added
or removed without notice.
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Toner cartridges are consumable products. When there is not enough toner, this
may cause the case where white streaks appear on the printed paper in
longitudinal direction, or the printed paper comes out faint or uneven. If this type of
symptom may occur, perform the following procedure before replacing the toner
cartridge. You may be able to print for a while until the toner is used up completely.
1
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
Routine Maintenance
7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-3
2
Open the front cover.
While pressing the open button on the top of the front cover a, open it gently b.
a
b
3
Remove the toner cartridge from the printer.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-4
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the high-voltage contact (A) or the electrical contacts (B) shown in the
figure, as this may result in damage to the printer.
(B)
(A)
4
Hold the toner cartridge as shown in the figure and shake it
gently 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside the
cartridge.
7
Routine Maintenance
Be careful not to spill the toner.
IMPORTANT
• If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in deterioration in print quality.
• Be sure to shake the toner cartridge gently. If you do not shake the cartridge gently,
toner may spill out.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-5
5
6
Hold the toner cartridge properly with the arrowed side facing
up as shown in the figure.
Install the toner cartridge.
Push the toner cartridge into the printer firmly until it touches the back of the
printer while aligning (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge with the toner
cartridge guides inside the printer.
7
Side View (Right)
Routine Maintenance
Side View (Left)
(A)
7-6
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7
Close the front cover.
Close the front cover gently and firmly.
IMPORTANT
• If you cannot close the front cover, make sure that the toner cartridge is installed
properly. If you try to close the front cover forcefully, this may result in damage to
the printer or toner cartridge.
• Do not leave the front cover open for a long time after installing the toner cartridge.
This may result in deterioration in print quality.
7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Routine Maintenance
If the print is too thin even after performing the operation above, replace the toner
cartridge with a new one.
7-7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Routine Maintenance
7
1
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
2
Open the front cover.
While pressing the open button on the top of the front cover a, open it gently b.
a
b
7-8
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
Remove the toner cartridge from the printer.
IMPORTANT
Be sure not to touch the high-voltage contacts (A) or electrical contact (B) shown in
the figure, as this may result in damage to the printer.
(B)
(A)
Routine Maintenance
7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-9
4
Take the new toner cartridge out of the box.
5
Take the toner cartridge out of the protective bag.
There is a cut near the arrow on the protective bag, so you can open it by hand.
However, if you cannot open it by hand, use scissors to open the protective bag
so as not to damage the toner cartridge.
IMPORTANT
Keep the protective bag for the toner cartridge. It may be required after taking out
the toner cartridge for printer maintenance.
Routine Maintenance
7
6
7-10
Hold the toner cartridge as shown in the figure, and shake it
gently 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside the
cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
• If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in deterioration in print quality. Be
sure to carry out this procedure properly.
• Be sure to shake the toner cartridge gently. If you do not shake the cartridge gently,
toner may spill out.
7
Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface.
8
Pull out the sealing tape.
While holding the toner cartridge steady a, hook your fingers into the tab and
fold it back.
Pull out the sealing tape (approx. 45 cm long) straight in the direction of the
arrow gently b.
b
a
CAUTION
If the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully or stopped at midpoint, toner
may spill out. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-11
Routine Maintenance
7
IMPORTANT
• Do not pull the sealing tape diagonally, upwards, or downwards. If the tape is
severed, it may become difficult to pull out completely.
• Pull out the sealing tape completely from the toner cartridge. If any tape remains in
the toner cartridge, this may result in poor print quality.
• When pulling out the sealing tape, be careful not to touch the toner cartridge
memory (A) or hold the drum protective shutter (B) with your hands.
7
Routine Maintenance
(A)
(B)
7-12
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9
Hold the toner cartridge properly with the arrowed side facing
up as shown in the figure.
10 Install the toner cartridge.
Push the toner cartridge into the printer firmly until it touches the back of the
printer while aligning (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge with the toner
cartridge guides inside the printer.
Side View (Right)
7
Routine Maintenance
Side View (Left)
(A)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-13
11 Close the front cover.
Close the front cover gently and firmly.
IMPORTANT
• If you cannot close the front cover, make sure that the toner cartridge is installed
properly. If you try to close the front cover forcefully, this may result in damage to
the printer or toner cartridge.
• Do not leave the front cover open for a long time after installing the toner cartridge.
This may result in deterioration in print quality.
Routine Maintenance
7
Precautions for Handling Toner Cartridges
A toner cartridge consists of light-sensitive components and intricate mechanical
components. Handling the toner cartridge without due care may lead to damage to
the toner cartridge or deterioration in print quality. Be careful of the following points
when removing or installing the toner cartridge.
WARNING
Do not throw a used toner cartridge into open flames, as this may cause the
toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
Take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
IMPORTANT
• When you take the toner cartridge out of the printer for servicing the printer, place the
toner cartridge into the original protective bag, or wrap it with a thick cloth immediately.
• Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or strong light.
7-14
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• Do not jolt the toner cartridge memory (A) or bring it near a magnetic field. This may
result in damage to the cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the
photosensitive drum inside the toner cartridge. Be sure not to touch or open the drum
protective shutter (B).
(A)
(B)
• Be careful not to hold or touch areas that are not specified in this procedure, such as the
electrical contacts (C). This may result in damage to the cartridge.
Routine Maintenance
7
(C)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-15
• When handling a toner cartridge, hold it properly as shown in the figure and handle it with
the arrowed side facing up. Do not place it vertically or upside-down.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the toner cartridge.
• Condensation may form in and on a toner cartridge if it is brought into an environment
that exposes it to sudden changes in temperature and/or humidity. If you move the toner
cartridge to a location that is warmer or has higher humidity, leave the cartridge in the
new location for 2 hours or longer without opening the protective bag to allow it to adjust
to the new temperature.
• Be sure to use a new toner cartridge before the expiration date indicated on the package.
• Keep the toner cartridge away from products that generate magnetic waves, such as a
display or computer.
• A toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Keep the toner cartridge away from products that
may be damaged by magnetic waves, such as a floppy disk or disk drive. This may lead
to damage to data.
Routine Maintenance
7
Storing Toner Cartridges
Be careful of the following points when storing a new toner cartridge or handling a
toner cartridge that has been taken out of the printer for maintenance or moving the
printer.
IMPORTANT
• Do not take a new toner cartridge out of the protective bag until it is ready to be used.
• When you take the toner cartridge out of the printer for servicing the printer or other
purposes, place the toner cartridge into the original protective bag, or wrap it with a thick
cloth immediately.
• Do not place it vertically or upside-down. Store the toner cartridge in the same
orientation as when installed in the printer.
• Do not store the toner cartridge in a place exposed to direct sunlight.
7-16
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• Do not store cartridges in a hot or humid place, or a place where the temperature and
humidity can change significantly.
Storing environment temperature: 0 to 35°C (32 to 95°F)
Storing humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (no condensation)
• Do not store the toner cartridge in a place where corrosive gases, such as ammonia, are
generated, or where a considerable amount of salt is contained in the air, or where there
is a lot of dust.
• Keep the toner cartridge out of the reach of small children.
• Keep the toner cartridge away from products that may be damaged by magnetic waves,
such as a floppy disk or disk drive.
■ Condensation
Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets may develop both inside and
outside of the toner cartridge due to the difference in temperature. The development of
water droplets is called condensation. Condensation will adversely affect the quality of the
toner cartridge.
Routine Maintenance
7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-17
Adjusting the Print Density
Adjust the print density using the following procedure when the printout result is too
dense or too light in color. The toner density is set to the standard density (4) before
shipment. You can adjust the toner density between 1 and 16.
1
Press the
(Settings) key.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
2
→
Select QUALITY MENU using [
QUALITY MENU
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
IMGE REFINEMENT→
7
Routine Maintenance
The item for QUALITY MENU is displayed.
3
Select DENSITY using [
DENSITY
→
=4
→
] and [
], then press [OK].
The setting value for DENSITY is displayed.
4
Specify the target numeric value using [
press [OK].
Pressing [
Pressing [
] and [
], then
] decreases the value, and the print density becomes lighter.
] increases the value, and the print density becomes denser.
6
→
=6
→
"=" is displayed on the left of the value, and the density is specified.
7-18
Adjusting the Print Density
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the Fixing Roller
When the front or back of the printed paper has smudge marks, clean the fixing
roller using the following procedure. Print quality deterioration can be prevented by
cleaning the fixing roller.
IMPORTANT
• The cleaning paper cannot be printed on any paper other than A4/Letter. Be sure to use
A4/Letter size paper.
• To print a cleaning paper, load a sheet of A4/Letter size paper in the multi-purpose tray.
1
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press the
2
Press the
(Online) key.
(Utility) key.
7
CONFIG.PAGE
3
4
→
Select CLEANING using [
CLEANING
→
A4
→
] and [
], then press [OK].
Select the size of the cleaning paper using [
press [OK].
A4
Routine Maintenance
UTILITY MENU
] and [
], then
→
EXECUTING
CLEANING PAPER
<CLEANING PAPER> appears in the display, and the printer waits to print the
cleaning paper.
Cleaning the Fixing Roller
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-19
5
Load a sheet of A4/Letter size paper in the multi-purpose tray,
then press the
(Online) key.
CLEANING PAPER
01 CLEANING
CLEANING
The cleaning paper is printed.
Routine Maintenance
7
6
7-20
If any paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray, remove it.
Cleaning the Fixing Roller
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7
8
Load the cleaning page with the printed side facing up and the
arrow mark going into the multi-purpose tray first.
Press the
(Online) key.
CLEANING
The paper is fed into the printer slowly, and the printer starts cleaning the fixing
roller.
7
NOTE
• Cleaning takes approximately 80 seconds.
• The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.
• When the front or back of the printed paper has smudge marks even after
performing the procedure above, perform the cleaning again. When doing so, do
not use the cleaning paper output in Step 5 above but load A4/Letter size blank
paper in the multi-purpose tray, and then perform the cleaning.
Routine Maintenance
01 CLEANING
Cleaning the Fixing Roller
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-21
Adjusting the Printing Position
If the printing position is skewed when printing from a certain paper source, you can
adjust the position from the control panel.
IMPORTANT
If any part of the print image lies outside the printable area after adjusting the printing
position, the part will be missing in the print result.
NOTE
Be aware that, when adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, the orientation of
the images on the reverse pages varies depending on the printing orientation or setting
for BIND.LOCATION.
Checking the Printing Position
Perform the Printing Position Adjustment Print and check the position and direction
to be adjusted.
7
Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
When adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, set 2-SIDED PRINT. (See p.
6-19) to ON previously.
1
Press the
(Feeder Selection) key.
SELECT FEEDER
PAPER SOURCE
2
7-22
→
Select PAPER SOURCE using [
PAPER SOURCE
→
=AUTO
→
Adjusting the Printing Position
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
] and [
], then press [OK].
3
Select the paper source that you want to check the printing
position using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
When adjusting the printing position for 2-sided printing, select the desired
paper source.
→
=CASSETTE 1
→
PAPER SOURCE
→
Press the
(Online) key.
PAPER SOURCE
00 READY
5
→
A4
Make sure that the printer is online.
If the printer is not online, press the
6
Press the
(Online) key.
7
(Utility) key.
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
7
→
Select PRNTPOSNPRINT using [
PRNTPOSNPRINT
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
EXECUTING
Adjusting the Printing Position
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-23
Routine Maintenance
4
CASSETTE 1
The Printing Position Adjustment Print is printed as shown in the following. The
top of the output paper is the top of the Printing Position Adjustment Print.
Top
Feeding
direction
Next, check the printout results and specify the direction and position to be adjusted in
"Adjusting the Printing Position" (See the next item).
Adjusting the Printing Position
Routine Maintenance
7
Next, check the printout results of the Printing Position Adjustment Print and specify
the direction and position to be adjusted.
The measurements of " " printed on paper are as the following:
10 mm
5 mm
10 mm
5 mm
* 5 mm from each edge of paper
This section describes the setting procedure for the following Printing Position
Adjustment Print printed with Cassette 1 specified, as an example.
7-24
Adjusting the Printing Position
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
In this case, adjust the printing position by -5.0 mm upward.
Top
Feeding
direction
IMPORTANT
OFFSET Y (DUP.) and OFFSET X (DUP.) allow you to specify the printing position of the
first page of 2-sided printing. The second page of 2-sided printing follows the settings for
each paper source.
1
Press the
(Online) key.
The
(Online) indicator goes off, allowing you to specify the settings on the
control panel.
2
Press the
(Settings) key.
SETUP
CONTROL MENU
3
→
Select USER MAIN. using [
USER MAIN.
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
ADJ.START POS. →
The item for USER MAIN. is displayed.
Adjusting the Printing Position
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-25
Routine Maintenance
7
NOTE
The printing position can be adjusted within a range from + 5.0 to - 5.0 mm.
4
Select ADJ.START POS. using [
] and [
], then press [OK].
ADJ.START POS. →
OFFSET Y(TRAY) →
The item for the printing position is displayed.
5
Select the paper source that you want to check the printing
position using [ ] and [ ], then press [OK].
OFFSET Y(CASS1)→
=0.0
6
→
Specify the target numeric value using [
press [OK].
] and [
], then
Check the printout results of the Printing Position Adjustment Print and select the
numerical value to adjust the position.
Each time you press [ ], the value increases in + 0.1 mm increments, and each
time you press [ ], the value decreases in - 0.1 mm increments. If you keep
holding down [ ] or [ ], the speed of the value changing is increased.
Routine Maintenance
7
-5.0
→
=-5.0
→
"=" is displayed on the left of the value, and the printing position is specified.
7
Press the
(Online) key.
OFFSET Y(CASS1)→
00 READY
7-26
A4
Adjusting the Printing Position
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8
Press the
9
Press the
(Online) key to place the printer online.
(Utility) key.
UTILITY MENU
CONFIG.PAGE
→
10 Select PRNTPOSNPRINT using [
PRNTPOSNPRINT
] and [
], then press [OK].
→
EXECUTING
The printing position adjustment print in which the setting is changed is printed.
Check the printout results to confirm the printing position.
To make further adjustment, repeat Step 1 to 10.
Routine Maintenance
7
Adjusting the Printing Position
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-27
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Periodically clean the outer surfaces and ventilation slots of the printer to maintain
the optimal printing quality. When cleaning the printer, be careful of the following
points in order to prevent an electrical shock or printer malfunctions.
WARNING
• When cleaning the printer, turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the
power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If
flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the printer,
it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to use a cleaning agent other than water or a mild detergent diluted with
water, as this may deform or crack the plastic materials in the printer.
• When using a mild detergent, be sure to dilute it with water.
• Grease or oil does not have to be applied to this printer. Be sure not to apply grease or
oil.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-28
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
Perform the following procedure.
Turn the printer OFF a.
If a USB cable is connected, turn the computer off b, and then disconnect the
USB cable c.
Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet d.
It is recommended that you shut down the printer before turning it OFF. (See
"Shutting Down the Printer," on p. 3-4)
If you are using WSD, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is
turned OFF.
c
d
b
2
Remove all the interface cables and the power cord from the
printer.
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-29
Routine Maintenance
7
a
3
Firmly wring a soft cloth dampened with water or a mild
detergent diluted with water, and wipe off the dirt.
If you use a mild detergent for cleaning, be sure to wipe away the detergent with
a soft cloth dampened with water.
4
5
When the printer is completely dry, plug the power plug into
the AC power outlet, and then connect the USB cable.
Routine Maintenance
7
After wiping off the dirt, wipe the printer with a dry cloth.
7-30
Cleaning the Outside of the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Moving the Printer
When changing the location of the printer or moving the printer for maintenance, be
sure to perform the following procedure.
CAUTION
Do not carry the printer with the paper cassette attached. If you do so, the paper
cassette may drop resulting in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the front cover and multi-purpose tray are closed before carrying the
printer.
NOTE
For details on the installation site, see "Installation Environment," on p. 2-3.
Routine Maintenance
7
Moving the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-31
1
Perform the following procedure.
Turn the printer OFF a.
If a USB cable is connected, turn the computer off b, and then disconnect the
USB cable c.
Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet d.
It is recommended that you shut down the printer before turning it OFF. (See
"Shutting Down the Printer," on p. 3-4)
If you are using WSD, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is
turned OFF.
c
d
b
7
Routine Maintenance
a
WARNING
Be sure to turn the printer and computer OFF, unplug the power plug, and
then disconnect all the interface cables from the printer before moving the
printer. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
2
7-32
Remove all the interface cables and the power cord from the
printer.
Moving the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
Pull out the paper cassette.
4
Move the printer unit from the installation site.
From the front side, securely hold the printer by the lift handles located on the
lower portion of the printer with both hands.
Routine Maintenance
7
Moving the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-33
CAUTION
• This printer weighs approximately 11.2 kg without the paper cassette
installed. Please be careful not to hurt your back or other portions of your
body when carrying the printer.
• Be sure not to hold the printer by the front portion, back portion, or any
portions other than the lift handles. If you do so, you may drop the printer,
resulting in personal injury.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-34
Moving the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• The back portion (A) of the printer is relatively heavy. Be careful not to get
off-balanced when lifting the printer. If you do so, you may drop the printer,
resulting in personal injury.
(A)
• Do not carry the printer with the paper feeder installed. If you do so, the
paper feeder may drop resulting in personal injury.
NOTE
If the optional paper feeder was previously installed in the printer, place the paper
feeder on the new installation site before carrying the printer to the site. For details
on the procedure for installing the paper feeder, see "Installing the Paper Feeder,"
on p. 9-2.
5
Put the printer down carefully at the new installation site.
CAUTION
Put the printer down slowly and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your
hands.
IMPORTANT
Secure sufficient space around the printer at the installation site so that you can
install the optional accessories and connect cables.
Moving the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-35
Routine Maintenance
7
6
Set the paper cassette in the printer.
Push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper
cassette is flush with the front surface of the printer.
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette, be careful not to catch your fingers.
7
Routine Maintenance
7
Connect the interface cables except for the USB cable, and
connect the power cord.
8
Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.
9
Connect the USB cable.
● Transporting the Printer
When transporting the printer for reasons such as relocating, remove the toner
cartridge and store the printer and the parts in the package that they came in
with the packing materials attached in order to prevent them from being
damaged while being transported.
If the original package and packing materials are not available, find an
appropriate box and packing materials and pack the printer and the parts
appropriately.
7-36
Moving the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling the Printer
This printer consists of various electronic and precise optical parts. Read the
following section so that you can handle the printer properly.
IMPORTANT
• For details on how to handle the printer, also read "Important Safety Instructions" (See p.
xv).
• Do not place any heavy objects on the printer, trays, or covers. This may result in damage
to the printer.
• Do not leave any cover open longer than required. Exposing the printer to direct sunlight
or strong light may result in deterioration in print quality.
• Avoid vibration while the printer is printing. This may result in deterioration in print quality.
• Be sure not to open the covers on the printer during printing. This may result in damage
to the printer.
Handling the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7-37
Routine Maintenance
7
• Handle each cover gently when opening or closing it. Failure to do so may result in
damage to the printer.
• If you want to spread a blanket on the printer to prevent dust from entering the printer,
turn the power OFF and allow the printer to cool down sufficiently before covering the
printer.
• If you do not plan to use the printer for a long period of time, unplug the power plug from
the AC power outlet.
• Do not use or store the printer in a room where chemicals are used.
• The face-down output tray and its surroundings become hot during or immediately after
using the printer. Do not touch the face-down output tray and its surroundings when
removing the jammed paper or performing the related operation.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-38
Handling the Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
8
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the remedies for problems such as a paper jam or an error message
appearing.
Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Precautions on Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Paper Jam Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Message List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Service Call Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Problems with the Power or Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Problems with the Printout Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
8-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting Flowchart
Yes
Printing is
impossible.
No
The paper setting is inappropriate.
See Driver Guide
Yes
The layout
is skewed.
The print setting in the application is inappropriate.
See the instruction manual supplied with your
application
No
The printing position is skewed.
See "Adjusting the Printing Position" on p. 7-22
Yes
8
Troubleshooting
The print
quality is
deteriorated.
No
The process has been changed due to insufficient memory.
See "Message List" on p. 8-26
Paper that cannot be used with this printer is being used.
See "Paper Requirements" on p. 4-2
The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge" on p. 7-2
Miscellaneous Problems
See "Message List" on p. 8-26
See "Service Call Display" on p. 8-36
See "When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results" on p. 8-38
8-2
Troubleshooting Flowchart
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
A message
is being displayed
on the print monitor.
No
This printer is not selected for the printer destination.
See Driver Guide
The printer is OFF.
See "Turning the Printer ON" on p. 2-33
Yes
Yes
The printer is offline.
See "Online and Offline" on p. 3-6
<Unable to
get status.> is
displayed.
The cable is not connected properly.
See "Connecting the Cables" on p. 2-26
No
<NO "size" PAPER> is being displayed.
See "Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette" on p. 4-17
See "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray" on p. 4-33
Yes
An error
message is being
displayed.
<PAPER JAM> is being displayed.
See "Paper Jams" on p. 8-4
Troubleshooting
A service call is being displayed.
See "Service Call Display" on p. 8-36
No
The
(Job)
indicator on the
printer is blinking.
8
Other error message is being displayed.
See "Message List" on p. 8-26
Yes
Cannot print because of the previous job remaining.
See "Canceling a Job" on p. 3-16
No
The printer is processing
the print data.
Please wait a moment.
Troubleshooting Flowchart
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-3
Paper Jams
When a paper jam occurs during printing for some reason, the printer beeps,
displaying the message <13 PAPER JAM> in the display. When a paper jam occurs,
remove the jammed paper using the following procedure, and then resume the job.
If the message that indicates the paper jam does not disappear even after removing
the jammed paper following the procedure, there is a possibility that torn pieces of
paper are still left inside the printer. Inspect each part of the printer again, and
completely remove all pieces of jammed paper.
Precautions on Clearing Paper Jams
WARNING
There are some areas inside the printer which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the printer, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the
printer, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make
sure the fixing unit is completely cool before removing the jammed paper.
Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns.
• The face-up output slot and its surroundings become hot during or immediately
after using the printer. Do not touch the face-up output slot and its
surroundings, as doing so may result in burns.
Troubleshooting
8
• The paper may be hot immediately after being output. Be careful when removing
the paper as well as when aligning the removed paper, especially after printing
continuously. Otherwise, this may result in burns.
8-4
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to allow the toner to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm
water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper jammed inside the printer, remove the jammed paper
gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your
eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands with the edges
of the paper.
• Keep your hands or clothing away from the roller in the output area after
removing jammed paper completely. Even if the printer is not printing, sudden
rotation of the roller may catch your hands or clothing, resulting in personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
• Remove jammed paper while the power of the printer is ON. If the power is turned OFF,
the data being printed will be deleted.
• Applying excess force may result in tearing paper or damaging the parts in the printer.
When removing jammed paper, pull out the paper in the most appropriate direction,
judging from the position of the paper.
• If paper is torn, be sure to find and remove any remaining pieces of paper.
• Be sure not to touch the high-voltage contacts (A) or electrical contact (B) shown in the
figure, as this may result in damage to the printer.
(B)
8
Troubleshooting
(A)
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-5
• Be sure not to touch the transfer roller (C). This may result in deterioration in print quality.
(C)
• The face-down output tray and its surroundings become hot during or immediately after
using the printer. Do not touch the face-down output tray and its surroundings when
removing the jammed paper or performing the related operation.
Troubleshooting
8
8-6
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper Jam Area
The message that appears in the display shows the location where the paper jam
occurred.
Face-down Output Tray
Face-up Output Slot
Multi-purpose Tray
C
A
B
D
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Duplex Print
Transport Area
E
Paper Feeder Unit
(Optional)
F
Paper flow for 1-sided printing
Paper flow for 2-sided printing
Paper Jam Area
A
Multi-purpose tray
Paper Jam Area Mark*
Message
<TRAY AREA>
B
Inside the front cover
<FRONT COVER>
C
Face-up output slot
<S-OUTPUT AREA>
D
Duplex print transport area
<DUPLEX UNIT>
E
Cassette 1
<CASS.1 AREA>
F
A
Cassette 2 (Only when the
paper feeder is installed)
<CASS.2 AREA>
Troubleshooting
8
* In "Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams" (See p. 8-8), this mark is attached to the left of each step, indicating the
paper jam area where the operation described in the step is required.
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-7
Procedure for Clearing Paper Jams
Remove the jammed paper using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
The error message may remain if jammed paper is removed without opening the front
cover. In this case, open and close the front cover once.
NOTE
The illustrations of the printer on the left of each step indicate paper jam areas where the
operation described in the step is required.
1
Confirm all the messages that appear in the display.
Messages appear one at a time. Confirm all of them.
As the messages disappear when the cover is open, take a note of them if
required.
13 PAPER JAM
FRONT COVER
2
Remove any paper jammed in the multi-purpose tray.
Troubleshooting
8
A B C D E F
IMPORTANT
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but
proceed to Step 3.
8-8
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
4
Open the output selection cover.
A B C D E F
A B C D E F
Troubleshooting
8
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-9
5
Press down the green pressure release levers on both sides
of the fixing unit.
A B C D E F
Even if you can see the paper here, do not remove it but proceed to Step 6.
6
Pull out the paper cassette.
A B C D E F
Troubleshooting
8
8-10
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If the paper feeder is installed, pull out the paper cassette of the paper feeder
also.
Even if you can see the paper here, do not remove it but proceed to Step 7.
7
Open the front cover.
While pressing the open button on the top of the front cover a, open it gently b.
A B C D E F
8
Troubleshooting
a
b
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-11
8
Remove the toner cartridge from the printer.
A B C D E F
Immediately place the removed toner cartridge into the original protective bag or
wrap it with a thick cloth.
NOTE
For details on handling toner cartridges, see "Precautions for Handling Toner
Cartridges," on p. 7-14.
9
A B C D E F
Remove the jammed paper gently to prevent unfixed toner from spilling.
Troubleshooting
8
If you see the top of the jammed paper inside the front cover,
simply pull out the paper to remove it.
IMPORTANT
If you pull the jammed paper obliquely upward, unfixed toner may spill. When
removing the jammed paper, pull it as horizontally as possible. Dirt inside the
printer may cause deterioration in print quality.
8-12
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10 Raise the transport guide, then tilt it toward you.
Holding the green tab, raise the transport guide, then tilt it toward you.
A B C D E F
CAUTION
Do not take your hands off the transport guide. The transport guide may
snap back to its original position, and this may result in personal injury.
Troubleshooting
8
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-13
11 Remove any jammed paper.
Remove the jammed paper gently to prevent unfixed toner from spilling.
A B C D E F
• If you can see the rear edge of the jammed paper
Remove the paper by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.
• If you cannot see either edge of the jammed paper
Pull out the rear edge of the paper a, then remove the paper by pulling it in the
direction of the arrow b.
a
Troubleshooting
8
b
8-14
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• If you can see the top edge of the jammed paper
Remove the paper by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.
IMPORTANT
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but
proceed to Step 12.
12 Gently move the transport guide back to its original position.
A B C D E F
Troubleshooting
8
CAUTION
Do not take your hands off the transport guide until the transport guide
moves back to its original position. The transport guide may snap back to
its original position, and this may result in personal injury.
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-15
13 Remove any jammed paper by pulling it in the direction of the
arrow.
A B C D E F
• If the top edge of the paper is output
• If you cannot see either edge of the jammed paper
Troubleshooting
8
• If you can see only the top edge of the jammed paper
8-16
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
14 Move the green pressure release levers of the fixing unit back
to their original positions.
A B C D E F
15 Close the output selection cover.
A B C D E F
Troubleshooting
8
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-17
16 Open the duplex unit cover.
Holding the opening at the center of the duplex unit cover, open it gently.
A B C D E F
17 Remove any jammed paper by pulling it in the direction of the
arrow.
A B C D E F
Troubleshooting
8
IMPORTANT
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but
proceed to Step 18.
8-18
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
18 Close the duplex unit cover.
Holding the opening at the center of the duplex unit cover, close it gently.
A B C D E F
19 Close the front cover.
Close the front cover gently and firmly.
A B C D E F
Troubleshooting
8
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-19
20 Remove any jammed paper while pushing it downward to
some extent.
A B C D E F
• In case of the printer unit
• In case of the paper feeder
Troubleshooting
8
8-20
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the feed rollers (A) in the printer unit and paper feeder. This may
result in damage to the printer or printer error.
)A(
21 Open the duplex print transport guide.
Holding the green tab, push the duplex print transport guide downward.
A B C D E F
Troubleshooting
8
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-21
22 Remove any jammed paper by pulling it in the direction of the
arrow.
A B C D E F
23 Close the duplex print transport guide.
A B C D E F
Holding the green tab, close both sides of the duplex print transport guide
securely.
Troubleshooting
8
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the duplex print transport guide is closed completely. If the duplex
print transport guide is not closed completely, this may result in misfeeds or paper
jams.
8-22
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
24 Set the paper cassette in the printer.
A B C D E F
Push the paper cassette into the printer firmly until the front side of the paper
cassette is flush with the front surface of the printer.
If the paper feeder is installed, set the paper cassette of the paper feeder also.
Troubleshooting
8
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette, be careful not to catch your fingers.
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-23
25 Open the front cover.
While pressing the open button on the top of the front cover a, open it gently b.
A B C D E F
a
b
26 Install the toner cartridge.
1. Take the toner cartridge out of the protective bag or thick cloth.
A B C D E F
2. Hold the toner cartridge properly with the arrowed side facing up as shown in
the figure.
Troubleshooting
8
8-24
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Push the toner cartridge into the printer firmly until it touches the back of the
printer while aligning (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge with the toner
cartridge guides inside the printer.
Side View (Right)
Side View (Left)
(A)
27 Close the front cover.
Close the front cover gently and firmly.
A B C D E F
Troubleshooting
8
IMPORTANT
• If you cannot close the front cover, make sure that the toner cartridge is installed
properly. If you try to close the front cover forcefully, this may result in damage to
the printer or toner cartridge.
• Do not leave the front cover open for a long time after installing the toner cartridge.
This may result in deterioration in print quality.
Paper Jams
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-25
Message List
When the printer cannot continue printing for some reason (an error status), the
printer beeps, the
(Message) indicator comes on, and an error message that
indicates the description of the error appears in the display. A Warning message
appears in the display when the printer requires some remedy (a warning status)
although the job is not affected.
If either of these messages appears, perform the following procedures according to
the message.
NOTE
• When multiple warnings are occurring at the same time, the Warning messages appear
by rotation.
• When the printer is in error status and warning status at the same time, the Warning
message does not appear.
• Even when a message with (Warning Message) appears (when the printer is in a
warning status), the printer does not stop printing.
• For a message with the <Auto Error Skip> mark, you can skip the error by pressing the
(Online) key and continue printing. However, part of the print data may be missing or
it may not be printed properly. When you want to stop the process, perform a soft reset to
eliminate the cause of the error, press the
(Online) key, and then print again. Also,
you can automatically skip the errors to which this mark is attached by setting AUTO
ERROR SKIP in the SETUP menu to ON.
Troubleshooting
8
<E nnn-nnnn> ("n" represents a number)
Cause
A problem has occurred inside the printer.
Remedy
Solve the problem following the instructions in "Service Call Display" (See p.
8-36).
<OF OPT.CONN.ERR.>
8-26
Cause 1
The optional paper feeder is not installed properly.
Remedy
Turn the power OFF, install the paper feeder properly, and then turn it ON again.
Cause 2
The optional paper feeder is installed or removed when the printer is ON.
Remedy
Turn the power OFF, install or remove the paper feeder, then turn the printer ON
again.
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cause 3
The connector of the optional paper feeder is disconnected.
Remedy
Turn the printer OFF, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Cause 4
A paper feeder that is not for this printer is installed.
Remedy
Turn the power OFF, install the paper feeder for this printer, and then turn it ON
again.
<11 NO "size" PAPER>
Cause
Paper of the size specified in the application is not loaded in the paper
source (in all the paper sources when PAPER SOURCE is set to AUTO; in
the specified paper source when the setting is fixed).
Remedy 1 Refill or load paper.
Remedy 2 Press the
(Feeder Selection) key, then select other paper source for the
same paper size or larger paper size. (See "Selecting a Paper Source," on p.
4-11)
<12 COVER OPEN>
The front cover is open.
Remedy
Close the front cover firmly. If the printer is not online, press the
key.
(Online)
8
<13 PAPER JAM>
Cause
Paper is jammed inside the printer
Remedy
Remove the jammed paper and set the paper cassette and covers to the
original position. If the printer is not online, press the
(Online) key. (See
"Paper Jams," on p. 8-4)
IMPORTANT
• If paper jams have occurred at multiple areas at the same time, the areas appear in the
display by rotation.
• If you have removed the jammed paper without opening any cover, be sure to open and
close the front cover once, and then press the
(Online) key.
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-27
Troubleshooting
Cause
<14 NO TONER CART>
Cause
The toner cartridge is not installed or installed improperly.
Remedy
Install the toner cartridge properly. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p.
7-2)
<18 FEED ERROR>
Cause
Paper of the size or type that cannot be fed from the multi-purpose tray or
paper cassette is specified.
Remedy 1 If a paper source is specified, press the
PAPER SOURCE to AUTO.
(Feeder Selection) key, then set
Remedy 2 Press the
(Feeder Selection) key, select a paper source from which paper of
the specified size or type can be fed, then load paper.
Remedy 3 Specify the settings for STD PAPER SIZE and STD PAPER TYPE in the
FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu to the size or type of paper that
can be loaded in the paper source.
Remedy 4 Press the
(Online) key, then print from the currently selected paper source.
However, this may result in deterioration in print quality.
<1H CHK TNR CONN.>
8
Troubleshooting
Cause
(Warning Message)
There is a possibility that the toner cartridge is not installed properly.
Remedy 1 Remove the toner cartridge, then reinstall it properly.
Remedy 2 If <1H CHK TNR CONN.> appears and there is a problem with the print quality
even after applying the Remedy 1, remove the toner cartridge and replace it
with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p. 7-2)
<23 DOWN.MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The memory for registering macro and custom characters has run out and
overflowed.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing the
overflowed data cannot be registered.
(Online) key. However, the
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset using the RESET menu, increase the free space of RAM
using the following procedure, register the data again, and then print again.
• Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory will be deleted).
8-28
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
<26 SYS.MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The work memory required for the printer process has run out while the
system is processing the data (mainly the graphics data and text data).
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing the
(Online) key. However, the
data with which an error has occurred is not printed properly.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset using the RESET menu, and then increase the free space
of RAM using the following procedure.
• Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory will be deleted).
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
The specified emulation does not exist.
Remedy
Press the
(Online) key to continue printing from the next data. However, the
data with which an error has occurred is not printed.
<30 MEMORY FULL>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
The work memory has run out while the system is processing the data.
Remedy
The printer continues printing by pressing the
(Online) key. However, the
data with which an error has occurred may not be printed properly.
<32 2-SIDED ERROR>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The printer received 2-sided printing data of paper sizes (including the
orientation) or paper types unavailable for automatic 2-sided printing.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing the
data on each side is printed on two pages.
(Online) key. However, the
Remedy 2 After performing a soft reset in the RESET menu, change the setting to a paper
size or type available for automatic 2-sided printing, and then print again.
<33 WORK MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The work memory for each print mode cannot be secured.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing the
(Online) key. However, the
data with which an error has occurred is not printed properly.
IMPORTANT
When you continue printing by pressing the
(Online) key, be aware that the data of
macro that is already registered may be deleted.
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-29
8
Troubleshooting
<27 JOB START ERR>
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, increase the free space of RAM using
the following procedure, and then print again.
• Perform a hard reset or cycle the power of the printer (Be aware that all the
data in the memory that the printer has received will be deleted).
<35 TABLE FULL>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
The number of the documents in a job has exceeded 16.
Remedy
The printer continues printing by pressing the
(Online) key. However, the
job with which an error has occurred is not printed.
<38 LOW IMGE QLTY>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The printer cannot process the data because it is too complicated.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing the
(Online) key. However, the
printer prints with the image quality level being lowered.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, set GRADATION LEVEL (See p. 6-24)
in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP menu to STANDARD, and then
print again.
<39 SPL MEM.FULL>
Cause
8
<Auto Error Skip>
Because spool memory has run out, the printer cannot print.
Troubleshooting
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing the
(Online) key. However, the
page with which an error has occurred is not printed.
Remedy 2 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, specify the paper size smaller, and
then print again.
Remedy 3 Perform a soft reset in the RESET menu, set GRADATION LEVEL (See p. 6-24)
in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP menu to STANDARD, and then
print again.
Remedy 4 If 2-SIDED PRINT. in the FEEDER MENU options in the SETUP menu is set to
ON, specify OFF, and then print again.
Remedy 5 Change the setting for HALFTONES (See p. 6-26) in the QUALITY MENU
options in the SETUP menu, and then print again.
8-30
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
<41 CHK PAPER SZE>
Cause 1
The size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray or paper cassette is
different from the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE, CASSETTE1 SIZE, or
CASSETTE2 SIZE specified from the computer or control panel.
Remedy
Match the size specified in TRAY PAPER SIZE, CASSETTE1 SIZE, or
CASSETTE2 SIZE and the size of the loaded paper, and then press the
(Online) key.
Cause 2
You are using UFR II Printer Driver, and you loaded custom paper of its
long edges 215.9 mm or less and printed when TRAY PAPER SIZE,
CASSETTE1 SIZE, or CASSETTE2 SIZE in the FEEDER MENU options in
the SETUP menu was set to MIXED SIZE.
Remedy
Load the paper in landscape orientation, then print again.
Cause 3
CHK PAPER SIZE in the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP menu is set to
OFF.
Remedy
Set CHK PAPER SIZE (See p. 6-38) to ON, then print again.
<52 RAST.MODE ERR>
The printer received data in format that it does not support during printing
in the Raster mode.
Remedy 1 The printer continues printing by pressing the
data may not be printed properly.
(Online) key. However, the
Remedy 2 Print again using a printer driver that supports image data formats.
<53 SEC.PRINT ERR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
Secured print data is sent from a printer driver that is not for LBP3370.
Remedy
Press the
(Online) key to cancel the job.
<53 STORE ERROR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
The data for which a stored job print is specified is sent from a printer
driver that is not for LBP3370.
Remedy
Press the
(Online) key to cancel the job.
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-31
8
Troubleshooting
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
<58 JOB MEM.FULL>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
There is not sufficient free RAM space to process jobs.
Remedy 1 If you are processing multiple jobs at once, press the
(Online) key to cancel
printing, wait for other jobs complete, and then print again.
Remedy 2 If the job data is too large, divide the job and print again.
<59 JOB RX ERROR>
Cause
<Auto Error Skip>
The printer received any unanalyzable data while it is receiving a job, or it
timed out.
Remedy 1 Press the
(Online) key to cancel printing, then print again.
Remedy 2 A problem may be occurring in the network you are using. Check the status of
the network that your are using.
<A4 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
8
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
Troubleshooting
<A5 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<A7 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
8-32
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
<D7 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<D8 LAYOUT ERROR>
Cause
The page cannot be laid out because the memory has run out.
Remedy 1 Set [Graphics Mode] in UFR II Printer Driver to [Raster Mode], then print again.
(See Help of UFR II Printer Driver)
Remedy 2 After performing a soft reset using the RESET menu, perform a hard reset to
increase the free memory space or cycle the power of the printer, and then print
again. (Be aware that all the data in the memory that the printer has received
will be deleted.)
Remedy 3 Perform "Error Skip", then continue printing. However, the data with which an
error has occurred is not printed properly.
<D8 VERSION ERROR>
Cause
You tried to print from a printer driver that is not for LBP3370.
Remedy
Print from the printer driver for LBP3370.
<D8 SYNTAX ERROR>
Cause
Invalid data is sent when printing using UFR II Printer Driver.
Remedy 1 Press the
(Online) key to continue printing from the next data. However, the
page with which an error has occurred and its subsequent pages are not
printed.
Remedy 2 Confirm the data to be printed, then print again.
<D8 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-33
Troubleshooting
8
D9 IMG.DATA ERR.
Cause
Data which this printer cannot process is included in TIFF data or JPEG
data.
Remedy
This printer cannot print the data. Press the
(Online) key to cancel the job.
D9 IMG.REFER.ERR
Cause
Data which this printer cannot process is included in TIFF data.
Remedy
This printer cannot print the data. Press the
(Online) key to cancel the job.
<D9 nn ERROR> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred and the printer does not operate properly.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
<F9-nn PWR OFF>ON> ("nn" represents two-digit alphanumeric characters)
Cause
A problem has occurred while the printer is processing print data.
Remedy
Cycle the power of the printer. If the message appears even after cycling the
power of the printer, note down the message in the display, and contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
Troubleshooting
8
<FF FONT FULL>
Cause
Because of too many fonts to be registered, the field (font table) for
registering font information has run out and overflowed.
Remedy
The printer continues printing by pressing the
(Online) key. However, the
page with which an error has occurred is not printed properly.
<FM SIZE ERROR>
8-34
<Auto Error Skip>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
There is some font with its size exceeds the pseudo-scalable font size.
Remedy
Perform "Error Skip", then continue printing. However, the characters with which
an error has occurred are not printed properly.
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
<FM SCALE ERROR>
<Auto Error Skip>
Cause
There is a character in which the number of coordinate points on the
contour lines exceeds the limitation of a pseudo-scalable font.
Remedy
Perform "Error Skip", then continue printing. However, the characters with which
an error has occurred are not printed properly.
<PC LOAD "size">
Cause
The paper of the size specified in the application is not loaded in the
paper cassette or multi-purpose tray, or the paper source for the different
paper size is selected.
Remedy 1 Load the paper of the size selected in the application (or the one specified by
scaling factors). (See "Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 4-17)
Remedy 2 If you are using the multi-purpose tray, check TRAY PAPER SIZE, and when the
paper size does not match the size specified in the application, specify the
setting properly. (See "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 4-33)
Remedy 3 Press the (Feeder Selection) key, then select the paper cassette in which the
paper of the matched size is loaded. (See "Selecting a Paper Source," on p.
4-11)
IMPORTANT
If you open the front cover when the message <PC LOAD "size"> is displayed, the
message may disappear. However, be sure to follow the directions in the displayed
message to change the paper.
Message List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8
Troubleshooting
Remedy 4 Press the
(Online) key, then print to the currently loaded paper forcibly. If
you are using the multi-purpose tray, the setting for TRAY PAPER SIZE
automatically changes to the setting specified in the application.
8-35
Service Call Display
When a problem has occurred and the printer does not work properly, the service
call shown in the figure appears:
Message
Cause
Remedy
A problem has
("n" represents a number) occurred inside the
printer.
Cycle the power of the printer using the
following procedure. If the message does
not disappear after cycling the power of
the printer several times, contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
A problem has
occurred with the
E003-nnnn
fixing unit of the
("n" represents a number) printer.
Perform the following procedures from
the Step 2 to contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Ennn-nnnn
E001-nnnn
A problem has
occurred while the
Cycle the power of the printer using the
("n" represents a number) printer is processing following procedure.
print data.
F9-nn PWR OFF>ON
8
Troubleshooting
1
Turn the power OFF, wait for 10 seconds or longer, and then
turn it ON again.
OFF
After 10 seconds
ON
If the message does not reappear, the printer can be used as normal. If the error
message still appears, proceed to the next step.
8-36
Service Call Display
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2
3
Note down the alphanumeric characters and message in the
display.
Perform the following procedure.
Turn the printer OFF a.
If a USB cable is connected, turn the computer off b, and then disconnect the
USB cable c.
Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet d.
c
d
b
a
4
Troubleshooting
8
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
When contacting your Canon dealer, please report the problems and code
number that you have noted.
Service Call Display
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-37
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
If any problem occurs while you are using the printer, take the following measures
depending on the symptoms.
IMPORTANT
• If the printer does not operate properly or an error message appears, see "Message
List," on p. 8-26 and "Service Call Display," on p. 8-36.
• When a paper jam occurs, see "Paper Jams," on p. 8-4.
• If a symptom that is not indicated in this section occurs, if none of the indicated remedies
solve the problem, or if you cannot determine the problem, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
Problems with the Power or Printer Operation
The printer cannot be turned ON.
Troubleshooting
8
Cause 1
The power plug is unplugged from the AC power outlet.
Remedy
Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.
Cause 2
The printer is plugged to an extension cord or multiple power strip.
Remedy
Plug the power plug of the printer directly into the AC power outlet on the wall.
Cause 3
The breakers have tripped.
Remedy
Reset the breakers on the switch board.
Cause 4
There is a break in the power cord.
Remedy
If the printer is turned ON after replacing the power cord with the one that is of
the same type and is used for other device, there is a break in the power cord.
In this case, purchase a new power cord and replace it with the broken one.
The printer does not operate.
8-38
Cause 1
The printer is offline.
Remedy
Press the
(Online) key to turn on the
and Offline," on p. 3-6)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
(Online) indicator. (See "Online
Cause 2
There is data remaining in the memory (the
(Job) indicator is on).
Remedy
Press the
(Online) key to place the printer offline, then select FORM FEED
in the RESET menu to output all the data remaining in the memory. (See
"Canceling a Job," on p. 3-16)
Cause 3
The interface cable is disconnected.
Remedy
Connect the interface cable firmly to the interface connectors on the computer
and printer unit. (See "Connecting to a Computer," on p. 2-28)
Cause 4
This printer or any optional accessory is broken.
Remedy
Clear the problem referring to the message in the display. (See "Message List,"
on p. 8-26, "Service Call Display," on p. 8-36)
All the indicators on the print server are off.
Cause 1
The LAN cable is not connected properly or broken.
Remedy 1 Remove the LAN cable once, then connect it again.
Remedy 2 Replace the LAN cable with another one, then connect it.
Cause 2
The cable is connected to the UP-LINK (cascade) port on the hub.
Remedy 1 Connect the LAN cable to a port with a "X" mark.
Remedy 2 If the hub has a UP-LINK (cascade) switch, switch to "X".
8
A cross LAN cable is being used.
Remedy 1 Replace the cable with a straight LAN cable.
Remedy 2 Connect the cross LAN cable to the UP-LINK (cascade) port on the hub. If the
hub has a UP-LINK (cascade) switch, switch to "=".
NOTE
A cross LAN cable is a cable used to connect a printer and computer directly.
Cause 4
Cannot communicate with the hub.
Remedy 1 Make sure that the power of the hub is on.
Remedy 2 Set network transmission setting for the print server according to the
transmission speed of the connected hub. (See "ETHERNET DRIVER," on p.
6-35)
Remedy 3 Replace the hub.
Cause 5
The hardware of the print server is in an abnormal condition.
Remedy
Report the problems to your local authorized Canon dealer.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-39
Troubleshooting
Cause 3
The printer stopped printing during a job.
Cause
There is data remaining in the memory (the
(Job) indicator is on).
Remedy
Press the
(Online) key to place the printer offline, then select FORM FEED
in the RESET to output all the data remaining in the memory. (See "Canceling a
Job," on p. 3-16)
The indicators on the control panel do not come on.
Cause 1
The printer is not ON.
Remedy
Turn the printer ON.
Cause 2
The printer is in Power Save Mode.
Remedy
The printer will be ready to print after you send print data or press any key on
the control panel.
The keys on the control panel do not function.
Cause
There is data remaining in the memory (the
(Job) indicator is on).
Remedy
Press the
(Online) key to place the printer offline, then select FORM FEED
in the RESET menu. (See "Canceling a Job," on p. 3-16)
A paper jam occurs each time you print.
Troubleshooting
8
8-40
Cause 1
The amount of the paper loaded in the paper cassette exceeds the load
limitation.
Remedy
Reduce the amount of paper to within the load limitation and print again. (See
"Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 4-17)
Cause 2
Paper is not loaded properly in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Remedy
Load the paper properly and print again. (See "Loading Paper in the Paper
Cassette," on p. 4-17, "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 4-33)
Cause 3
Unusable paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used and print again. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 4-2)
Cause 4
You are using UFR II Printer Driver, and you loaded custom paper of its
long edges 215.9 mm or less and printed when TRAY PAPER SIZE,
CASSETTE1 SIZE, or CASSETTE2 SIZE in the FEEDER MENU options in
the SETUP menu was set to MIXED SIZE.
Remedy
Load the paper in landscape orientation, then print again.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cause 5
When UFR II Printer Driver was not used, non-standard size paper was
loaded in the landscape orientation to print.
Remedy
Load the paper in portrait orientation, then print again.
Cause 6
There is still jammed paper inside the printer.
Remedy
Remove any jammed paper and print again. (See "Paper Jams," on p. 8-4)
Problems with the Printout Results
Unreadable characters are printed.
The setting for the print mode is not appropriate.
Remedy
Fix the print mode at the appropriate one for the print data and print again. (See
"MODE SELECTION," on p. 6-36)
Cause 2
The data is printed from Windows without the supplied printer driver
installed for Windows.
Remedy
Install the supplied printer driver for Windows, then print again. (See Driver
Guide)
Cause 3
The printer setting in the DOS application is not appropriate.
Remedy
Specify the printer setting in the DOS application to the one that is compatible
with this printer. (See Driver Guide)
A blank page cannot be printed.
Cause
PAPER SAVE is set to ON.
Remedy
When printing a blank page, set PAPER SAVE (p. 6-40, p. 6-45) to OFF.
The last page cannot be printed.
Cause
The command that notifies of the end of the data is not sent from the
computer (the
(Job) indicator is on).
Remedy
Press the
(Online) key to place the printer offline, then select FORM FEED
in the RESET menu (If you print using an application that does not have a
printing function, the last page in which data is less than one page remains in
the memory). (See "Canceling a Job," on p. 3-16)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8
Troubleshooting
Cause 1
8-41
The data lies outside the paper.
Cause 1
You are using UFR II Printer Driver, and you loaded custom paper of its
long edges 215.9 mm or less and printed when TRAY PAPER SIZE,
CASSETTE1 SIZE, or CASSETTE2 SIZE in the FEEDER MENU options in
the SETUP menu was set to MIXED SIZE.
Remedy
Load the paper in landscape orientation, then print again.
Cause 2
When UFR II Printer Driver was not used, non-standard size paper was
loaded in the landscape orientation to print.
Remedy
Load the paper in portrait orientation, then print again.
Cause 3
Paper of the size smaller than the data size is loaded.
Remedy
Load the paper of the size that matches the data size or print the data in the
reduced size that matches the paper size. (See Driver Guide)
Cause 4
The position of the paper is incorrect.
Remedy
Load the paper properly and print again. (See "Loading Paper in the Paper
Cassette," on p. 4-17, "Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray," on p. 4-33)
Cause 5
A document with no margins was printed.
Remedy 1 Secure a margin around the data so that it fits within Printable Area (See p.
4-6), then print again.
8
Troubleshooting
Remedy 2 If you select the [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting Point] check box in
the [Finishing Details] dialog box in UFR II Printer Driver, the printer prints with
its printable area expanded. However, data may be printed with the edges
missing.
Cause 6
The printing position has been adjusted in ADJ.START POS. in the USER
MAIN. options in the SETUP menu.
Remedy
Adjust the printing position to an appropriate value using ADJ.START POS. in
the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP menu. (See "Adjusting the Printing
Position," on p. 7-22)
The printing position is skewed.
8-42
Cause 1
GUTTER, OFFSET Y, or OFFSET X in the LAYOUT MENU options in the
SETUP menu is specified.
Remedy
Set GUTTER, OFFSET Y, or OFFSET X in the LAYOUT MENU options in the
SETUP menu to "0", and then print again.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cause 2
"Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application are not specified
properly.
Remedy
Specify the settings for "Top Margin" and "Paper Position" in the application
properly, and then print again. (See the instruction manual supplied with your
application)
Cause 3
The printing position has been adjusted in ADJ.START POS. in the USER
MAIN. options in the SETUP menu.
Remedy
Adjust the printing position to an appropriate value using ADJ.START POS. in
the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP menu. (See "Adjusting the Printing
Position," on p. 7-22)
The next page is printed from halfway across the previous page.
Cause
"Line Spacing" or "Lines/Page" in the application is not specified
properly.
Remedy
Specify the settings for "Line Spacing" and "Lines/Page" in the application so
that data fits in one page, and print again. (See the instruction manual supplied
with your application)
Data is printed with its size reduced.
The printer is set to reduce the print size.
Remedy
Confirm the setting for [Manual Scaling] in the printer driver. (See Driver Guide)
Paper comes out wrinkled.
Cause 1
Paper is loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray at an angle.
Remedy
Load the paper in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray straight. (See
"Loading Standard Size Paper," on p. 4-20, "Loading Paper (Other than
Envelopes)," on p. 4-35)
Cause 2
Paper is damp since the paper has been stored in unsuitable condition.
Remedy
Replace the paper with new one and print again. (See "Paper Requirements,"
on p. 4-2)
Paper curls.
Cause 1
Paper is damp since the paper has been stored in unsuitable condition.
Remedy
Replace the paper with new one and print again. (See "Paper Requirements,"
on p. 4-2)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-43
8
Troubleshooting
Cause
Cause 2
Paper is inappropriate.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used with this printer. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 4-2)
Cause 3
The paper is too thin.
Remedy
Set [Paper Type] to [Plain Paper L] in the printer driver.
In order to specify the setting for [Paper Type], display the [Paper Source] sheet.
Cause 4
Paper that curls easily is output to the face-down output tray.
Remedy
When printing transparencies or envelopes that curl easily, switch an output tray
to the face-up output slot. (See "Output Trays," on p. 4-13)
Nothing is printed on the paper.
8
Cause 1
The toner cartridge was installed with the sealing tape still attached.
Remedy
Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, pull out the sealing tape, and reinstall
the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge," on p. 7-2)
Cause 2
Multiple sheets of paper were fed at a time.
Remedy
Align the paper stack in the paper cassette properly and load it again. (See
"Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette," on p. 4-17)
Cause 3
A problem has occurred inside the printer.
Troubleshooting
Remedy 1 If <Ennn-nnnn> is displayed in the display, turn the power OFF, wait for 10
seconds or longer, and then turn the power ON again. This may clear the
message.
Remedy 2 If the message does not disappear even after applying the Remedy 1, contact
your local Canon dealer for servicing.
White dust is attached to the printed transparencies.
8-44
Cause
The transparencies were printed just after another type of paper was
printed continuously.
Remedy
If you print transparencies after printing paper other than transparency
continuously, chipped paper may attach to the transparencies when they are
output. In this case, wipe and remove the chipped paper with a soft cloth.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print Quality Problems
White streaks appear.
Cause 1
Toner in the toner cartridge is running out.
Remedy
Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, shake it gently 5 or 6 times to evenly
distribute the toner, and then reinstall the toner cartridge. If this does not solve
the problem, replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridge," on p. 7-2)
Cause 2
The drum in the toner cartridge has deteriorated.
Remedy
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge," on p. 7-2)
Printed pages have white specks.
Appropriate paper is not being used.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used and print again. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 4-2)
Cause 2
Paper is damp since the paper has been stored in unsuitable condition.
Remedy
Replace the paper with new one and print again. (See "Paper Requirements,"
on p. 4-2)
Cause 3
The drum in the toner cartridge has deteriorated.
Remedy
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge," on p. 7-2)
The overall print result is faint.
Cause 1
The setting for the toner density is not appropriate.
Remedy
Adjust DENSITY (See p. 6-25) in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP
menu.
Cause 2
TONER SAVE in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP menu is set to
ON.
Remedy
Set TONER SAVE (See p. 6-25) in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP
menu to OFF.
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8
Troubleshooting
Cause 1
8-45
The overall print result is dark.
Cause 1
The setting for the toner density is not appropriate.
Remedy
Adjust DENSITY (See p. 6-25) in the QUALITY MENU options in the SETUP
menu.
Cause 2
The printer is exposed to direct sunlight or strong light.
Remedy
Move the printer to a place where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight or
strong light. Alternatively, move the strong light source away from the printer.
The print is uneven.
Troubleshooting
8
Cause 1
Toner in the toner cartridge is running out.
Remedy
Take the toner cartridge out of the printer, shake it gently 5 or 6 times to evenly
distribute the toner, and then reinstall the toner cartridge. If this does not solve
the problem, replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridge," on p. 7-2)
Cause 2
Paper is too moist or too dry.
Remedy
Replace the paper with appropriate one and print again. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 4-2)
Cause 3
The toner cartridge has deteriorated or is damaged.
Remedy
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge," on p. 7-2)
The front or back of the printed paper has smudge marks
Cause
The fixing roller is dirty.
Remedy
Clean the fixing roller. (See "Cleaning the Fixing Roller," on p. 7-19)
A portion of a page is not printed.
Cause 1
The scale factor is incorrect.
Remedy 1 Clear the [Manual Scaling] check box in the printer driver. If the check box is
cleared, the scale factor will be set according to [Page Size] and [Output Size]
automatically.
In order to specify the setting for [Manual Scaling], display the [Page Setup]
sheet.
8-46
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Remedy 2 Select the [Manual Scaling] check box in the printer driver, then specify an
appropriate scale factor according to the paper size to be used.
In order to specify the setting for [Manual Scaling], display the [Page Setup]
sheet.
Cause 2
The position of the paper is incorrect.
Remedy
Load the paper properly. (See "Loading Standard Size Paper," on p. 4-20,
"Loading Paper (Other than Envelopes)," on p. 4-35)
Cause 3
A document with no margins was printed.
Remedy
Secure a margin around the data so that it fits within Printable Area (See p.
4-6), then print again.
The paper is printed completely black.
Cause
The drum in the toner cartridge has deteriorated.
Remedy
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge," on p. 7-2)
Vertical streaks appear on the printed paper.
Cause 1
The toner cartridge was replaced, or the printer has not printed for a long
period of time.
Remedy
Set [Special Print Adjustment B] to [Mode 1] in the printer driver.
If the problem is not solved by specifying [Mode 1], specify [Mode 2].
If the problem is not solved by specifying [Mode 2], specify [Mode 3].
In order to specify the setting for [Special Print Adjustment B], display the
following dialog box.
- For UFR II Printer Driver: Display the [Advanced Settings] dialog box by
clicking [Finishing Details] in the [Finishing] sheet, then clicking [Advanced
Settings] in the [Finishing Details] dialog box.
- For PCL Printer Driver: Display the [Finishing Details] dialog box by clicking
[Finishing Details] in the [Finishing] sheet.
IMPORTANT
• Selecting [Off] may also avoid vertical streaks appearing on the printed paper. In
this case, specify [Off].
• If [Special Print Adjustment B] is specified, printing speed may drop.
Cause 2
Depending on the paper type or the operating environment, vertical
streaks may appear on the printed paper.
Remedy 1 Replace the paper with new paper in an unopened package. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 4-2)
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8-47
Troubleshooting
8
Remedy 2 Set SP.PRINT ADJ A (See p. 6-39) in the USER MAIN. options in the SETUP
menu to MODE 2.
If the problem is not solved by specifying MODE 2, specify MODE 3.
If the problem is not solved by specifying MODE 3, specify MODE 4.
IMPORTANT
• Resetting the setting to MODE 1 due to change in paper type or operating
environment may also avoid vertical streaks appearing on the printed paper.
In this case, specify MODE 1.
• Vertical streaks are alleviated by specifying MODE 2, MODE 3, or MODE 4.
However, this decreases print density compared to when MODE 1 is specified.
This may also make outlines appear to be blurred or slightly jagged.
NOTE
You can also specify the setting for SP.PRINT ADJ A in [Special Print Adjustment
A] in the printer driver.
Toner does not fix well.
Cause
Paper is inappropriate.
Remedy
Replace the paper with one that can be used with this printer. (See "Paper
Requirements," on p. 4-2)
8
Cause
The size of the print data was larger than that of the loaded paper.
Troubleshooting
The back of the printed paper has smudge marks.
Remedy
Check if the size of the print data matches that of the loaded paper.
8-48
When You Cannot Obtain Appropriate Printout Results
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing the Optional
Accessories
9
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the procedures for installing the optional accessories on the printer.
Installing the Paper Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Removing the Packing Materials and Installing the Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
9-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing the Paper Feeder
The paper feeder is to be installed at the bottom of the printer unit.
PAPER FEEDER PF-35P
WARNING
Be sure to turn the printer OFF, unplug the power plug, and then disconnect all
the interface cables and power cord from the printer before installing the paper
feeder. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged,
resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
• Do not touch the connector (A) in the paper feeder. This may result in damage to the
printer or misfeeds.
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
)A(
• If you are printing from Cassette 2, make sure that Cassette 1 is set before printing. If you
print from Cassette 2 when Cassette 1 is not set, this will cause paper jams.
9-2
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE
Load paper in the paper feeder in the same manner as you load paper in Cassette
1. For more details, see "Chapter 4 Loading and Outputting Paper".
Moving the Printer
When installing the paper feeder in the printer after installing the printer, move the
printer to an appropriate location temporarily using the following procedure.
WARNING
Be sure to turn the printer and computer OFF, unplug the power plug, and then
disconnect all the interface cables from the printer before moving the printer.
Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a
fire or electrical shock.
CAUTION
Do not carry the printer with the paper cassette attached. If you do so, the paper
cassette may drop resulting in personal injury.
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9-3
1
Perform the following procedure.
Turn the printer OFF a.
If a USB cable is connected, turn the computer off b, and then disconnect the
USB cable c.
Disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet d.
It is recommended that you shut down the printer before turning it OFF. (See
"Shutting Down the Printer," on p. 3-4)
If you are using WSD, the shutdown notifies the computer that the printer is
turned OFF.
c
d
b
a
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
2
9-4
Remove all the interface cables and the power cord from the
printer.
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
Pull out the paper cassette.
4
Move the printer unit from the installation site.
From the front side, securely hold the printer by the lift handles located on the
lower portion of the printer with both hands.
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9-5
CAUTION
• This printer weighs approximately 11.2 kg without the paper cassette
installed. Please be careful not to hurt your back or other portions of your
body when carrying the printer.
• Be sure not to hold the printer by the front portion, back portion, or any
portions other than the lift handles. If you do so, you may drop the printer,
resulting in personal injury.
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
9-6
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• The back portion (A) of the printer is relatively heavy. Be careful not to get
off-balanced when lifting the printer. If you do so, you may drop the printer,
resulting in personal injury.
(A)
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the front cover and multi-purpose tray are closed before carrying
the printer.
Removing the Packing Materials and Installing the Paper
Feeder
The paper feeder is to be installed at the bottom of the printer unit.
CAUTION
your hands.
• Do not carry the printer with the paper cassette attached. If you do so, the paper
cassette may drop resulting in personal injury.
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9-7
9
Installing the Optional Accessories
• Put the printer or paper feeder down slowly and carefully. Be careful not to hurt
• Do not carry the printer with the paper feeder installed. If you do so, the paper
feeder may drop resulting in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• If there is any packing material remaining inside the paper feeder, this may result in
misfeeds or damage to the printer when operating the printer. Be sure to remove all the
packing materials following the procedure.
• The removed packing materials are required when transporting the printer for relocation
or maintenance. Keep them where they will not get lost.
NOTE
The packing materials may be changed in form or position to be placed, or may be added
or removed without notice.
1
Pull out the paper cassette.
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
9-8
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2
3
Remove the tape that is securing the packing material in the
paper cassette (2 locations).
Remove the packing material in the paper cassette.
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9-9
4
Place the paper feeder at the installation site.
When carrying the paper feeder, hold the lift handles on both sides with both
hands as shown in the figure.
IMPORTANT
• Do not touch the connector (A) in the paper feeder. This may result in damage to
the printer or misfeeds.
)A(
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
• Do not install the paper feeder on a platform that may warp from the weight of the
printer and optional accessories, or where the printer is liable to sink (such as a
carpet or mat).
• Secure sufficient space around the paper feeder so that you can install the printer
and connect cords such as the power cord and interface cables.
9-10
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5
When installing the printer unit on the paper feeder, gently set
it down so that each surface of the printer unit is flush with
the front or side surfaces of the paper feeder.
Also, match the positioning pins (A) and connector (B) when setting the printer
unit.
(B)
(A)
(A)
IMPORTANT
If the printer unit cannot be placed on the paper feeder properly, lift the printer unit
once, hold it horizontally, and place it again. If you try to set the printer unit
forcefully without lifting it, the connector and positioning pins may be broken.
Set the paper cassette in the printer unit and paper feeder.
9
CAUTION
When setting the paper cassette, be careful not to catch your fingers.
7
Connect the interface cables except for the USB cable, and
connect the power cord.
8
Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.
9
Connect the USB cable.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to turn the printer ON once when loading paper in the paper cassette for
the first time after installing the paper feeder.
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9-11
Installing the Optional Accessories
6
NOTE
After installing the paper feeder, you have to specify the settings for the optional
accessories in the [Device Settings] sheet in the printer driver. You can obtain
information about the status of the optional accessories automatically by clicking
[Get Device Status] in the [Device Settings] sheet.
If you cannot obtain the status of the optional accessories of the printer
automatically, select the installed optional accessories from [Paper Source
Options].
Installing the Optional Accessories
9
9-12
Installing the Paper Feeder
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Appendix
10
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the contents of the various lists, printer specifications, and index.
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Typeface Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Scalable Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Symbol Sets Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Character Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
ISO Substitution Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31
Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33
Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34
Dimensions of Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
10-1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
This section describes the lists common to all the settings in the print mode.
IMPORTANT
The following lists are samples. The contents may partially differ from the lists printed by
your printer.
Configuration Page
The capacity of the built-in RAM and the
settings for the common printing environment
are printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press the
(Utility) key to display the UTILITY
menu.
3. Press [ ] to display CONFIG.PAGE.
4. Press [OK] to output the page.
Appendix
10
10-2
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Status Print
Prints the version number of the print server
equipped with this printer and the settings.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press the
(Utility) key to display the UTILITY
menu.
3. Press [ ] to display NW STATUS PRINT.
4. Press [OK] to output the page.
Printing Position Adjustment Print
Displays the current printing positions of each
paper source. Adjust the printing positions
referring to this print. For more details, see
"Adjusting the Printing Position," on p. 7-22.
1. Press the
(Feeder Selection) key.
2. Select PAPER SOURCE using [
] and [ ], then
press [OK].
3. Select the paper source that you want to check the
printing position using [ ] and [ ], then press
[OK].
4. Make sure that the printer is online. If the printer is
not online, press the
(Online) key.
Appendix
5. Press the
10
(Utility) key to display the UTILITY
menu.
6. Display PRNTPOSNPRINT using [
7. Press [OK] to output the page.
].
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-3
Device Log List
Prints logs for error messages or service calls.
Also, if a paper jam occurs, its occurrence area
and time are printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press the
(Utility) key to display the UTILITY
menu.
3. Press [ ] to display DEVICE LOG LIST.
4. Press [OK] to print.
Appendix
10
10-4
The Lists Common to All the Settings in the Print Mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode
This section describes the lists common to certain settings in the print mode.
IMPORTANT
The following list is a sample. The contents may partially differ from the lists printed by
your printer.
PCL Fonts List
A list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL
mode is printed.
1. Make sure that the printer is online.
2. Press the
(Utility) key to display the UTILITY
menu.
3. Press [ ] to display PCL UTILITY.
4. Press [OK] to display Exclusive Utilities for PCL.
5. Press [ ] to display FONTS LIST.
6. Press [OK] to output the page.
Appendix
10
The Lists Common to Certain Settings in the Print Mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-5
Typeface Samples
The fonts lists printed from the UTILITY menu are a comprehensive listing of all
fonts currently available. The listing contains the names and print samples of the
fonts stored on the printer.
Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Courier
CG Times
CG Times Bold
CG Times Italic
CG Times Bold Italic
CG Omega
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold Italic
Coronet
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Univers Medium
Univers Bold
Univers Medium Italic
10
Univers Bold Italic
Appendix
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Antique Olive
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
Garamond Antique
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv
10-6
Typeface Samples
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Garamond Kursiv Halbfeet
Marigold
Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold
Arial
Arial Bold
Arial Italic
Arial Bold Italic
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Symbol
Wingdings
Courier Bold
Courier Italic
Courier Bold Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)
Line Printer (10U)
Line Printer (8U)
Line Printer (0N)
10
Line Printer (11U)
Appendix
Line Printer (12U)
Line Printer (1U)
Line Printer (2N)
Line Printer (5N)
Line Printer (6N)
Line Printer (9N)
Typeface Samples
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-7
Symbol Sets Supported
This section provides a list to the character code tables for the characters in each
symbol set.
Character Code Tables
■ Roman-8 (8U)
Appendix
10
10-8
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Roman-9 (4U)
■ ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 (0N)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-9
■ ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 (2N)
■ ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 (5N)
Appendix
10
10-10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ ISO 8859/15 Latin 9 (9N)
■ PC-8, Code Page 437 (10U)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-11
■ PC-8 D/N, Danish/Norwegian (11U)
■ PC-850, Multilingual (12U)
Appendix
10
10-12
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ PC-858, Multilingual with Euro (13U)
■ PC-852, Latin 2 (17U)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-13
■ PC-Turkish (9T)
■ Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (19U)
Appendix
10
10-14
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Windows 3.1 Latin 2 (9E)
■ Windows 3.1 Latin 5 (5T)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-15
■ DeskTop (7J)
■ PS Text (10J)
Appendix
10
10-16
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Ventura International (13J)
■ Ventura US (14J)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-17
■ Microsoft Publishing (6J)
■ Math-8 (8M)
Appendix
10
10-18
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ PS Math (5M)
■ Ventura Math (6M)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-19
■ PI Font (15U)
■ Legal (1U)
Appendix
10
10-20
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Windows 3.0 Latin 1 (9U)
■ ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 (6N)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-21
■ PC-775 (26U)
■ PC-1004 (9J)
Appendix
10
10-22
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Windows Baltic (19L)
■ MC Text (12J)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-23
■ Symbol (19M)
■ Wingdings (579L)
Appendix
10
10-24
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ Dingbats (14L)
■ PC-860 Portugal (20U)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-25
■ PC-865 Norway (25U)
■ PC-8 Greek Alternate Code Page 437 (14G)
Appendix
10
10-26
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ ISO 6: ASCII (0U)
ISO Substitution Tables
■ ISO 4: United Kingdom (1E)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-27
■ ISO 11: Swedish (0S)
■ ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian (0D)
Appendix
10
10-28
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
■ ISO 21: German (1G)
■ ISO 69: French (1F)
Appendix
10
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-29
■ ISO 15: Italian (0I)
■ ISO 17: Spanish (2S)
Appendix
10
10-30
Symbol Sets Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifications
Hardware Specifications
Type
Desktop Page Printer
Printing method
Electrophoto Method (On-demand fixing)
Resolution
600dpi
Printing speed
Plain paper (60 to 89 g/m2)
When printing A4 continuously: 26 pages/min.
* Print speed may drop in stages depending on the
paper size, paper type, print copies, and the settings of
the fixing mode. (This is because the safety function
that prevents damage caused by heat becomes
active.)
Warm-up time
(20°C (68°F))
0 second from standby mode (approx. 9 seconds or less
from power ON)
* May vary depending on the use conditions (such as
the toner cartridge you are using, menu setting,
availability of the optional accessories, and installation
environment).
First print time
When printing A4 with the printing side facing down
Approx. 6.5 seconds or less
* May vary depending on the toner cartridge you are
using or the output environment.
Appendix
10
Specifications
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-31
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
(Optional)
Paper size
Appendix
10
10-32
- Standard sizes
A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive
- Custom sizes
When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 148.0 to
215.9 mm; Length 210.0 to 355.6 mm
When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when
UFR II Printer Driver is used): Width 210.0 to 215.9 mm;
Length 210.0 to 215.9 mm
Paper capacity: approx. 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
- Standard sizes
A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, Envelope DL,
Envelope COM10, Envelope C5, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope B5, Index Card, Statement, 16K
- Custom sizes
Multi-purpose
When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 76.2 to
tray
215.9 mm; Length 127.0 to 355.6 mm
When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when
UFR II Printer Driver is used): Width 127.0 to 215.9 mm;
Length 127.0 to 215.9 mm
Paper capacity: approx. 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Automatic 2-sided printing
A4, Legal, Letter
Paper output
Face-down/Face-up
Output capacity
Face-down output tray: approx. 125 sheets (80 g/m2)
Face-up output slot: 1 sheet
Noise (Declared noise
emission in accordance
with ISO 9296)
Lwad (declared A-weighted sound power level (1B =
10dB))
During standby: Background noise level
During operation: 6.81 B or less
Sound pressure level (Bystander position)
During standby: Background noise level
During operation: 55 dB (A) or less
Operating environment
(Printer unit only)
Operating environment temperature: 10 to 32.5°C (50 to
90.5°F)
Humidity: 20 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
Power supply
220 -240 V (±10 %) 50/60 Hz (±2 Hz)
Power consumption (at
temperature of 20°C (68°F))
Average during operation: approx. 403 W
Average during standby: approx. 9 W
Average in the Panel Off mode (Power Save Mode 1):
approx. 8 W
Average in the Deep Sleep mode (Power Save Mode 2):
approx. 5 W
Maximum: 950 W or less
Specifications
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Consumables
Weight
Toner
cartridge
Number of printable pages: approx. 3,000 pages*1 or
7,000 pages*1 (Canon Genuine Cartridge)
*1 When the pages are on the basis of "ISO/IEC
19752"*2 on printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting
*2 "ISO/IEC 19752" is the global standard related to
"Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield
for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and
multi-function devices that may contain printer
components" issued by ISO (International
Organization for Standardization)
Printer unit
and included
parts
Printer
(excluding the toner cartridge)................ approx. 11.4 kg
Toner cartridge ......................................... approx. 0.8 kg
Consumables
and optional
accessories
Toner cartridge (Canon Genuine Cartridge)
(Number of printable pages: approx. 3,000 pages)
.................................................................. approx. 0.8 kg
Toner cartridge (Canon Genuine Cartridge)
(Number of printable pages: approx. 7,000 pages)
.................................................................. approx. 1.0 kg
PAPER FEEDER PF-35P
(Including the paper cassette) .................. approx. 3.5 kg
Controller Specifications
CPU
R4000 series-333 MHz*
* The upper limit of the frequency range
Memory (RAM) capacity 64 MB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB1.1 equivalent) X 1
LAN connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) X 1
User interface
LCD 16 characters X 1 line
8 LED indicators
8 Operation keys
Specifications
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10
Appendix
Host interface
10-33
Software Specifications
Command language
PCL5e, PCL6, UFR II
Built-in fonts
PCL: 45 Scalable fonts, 10 Bitmap fonts
PCL5e, PCL6
The printable areas are as follows.
A
B
C
D
Paper Size
Printable area
A: Left Edge B: Right Edge C: Top Edge D: Bottom Edge
A4
6.1
6.1
5.0
5.0
B5
6.1
6.1
5.0
5.0
A5
6.1
6.1
5.0
5.0
Legal
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Letter
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Executive
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Statement
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
16K
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Custom Size
6.4
6.4
5.0
5.0
Index Card
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
Envelope
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
(Unit: mm)
UFR II
Data cannot be printed within 5 mm margins on all sides of the
paper. (For envelopes, 10 mm margin on all sides)
* If you have selected the [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as
Starting Point] check box in the [Finishing Details] dialog box
in UFR II Printer Driver, you can extend the printable area to
near the edges of the paper. However, the data may be printed
with the edges missing when a document with no margins is
printed, even if the [Print with Upper Left of Sheet as Starting
Point] check box is selected. In this case, specify the scaling
factor in UFR II Printer Driver to print smaller so that any data
on the document will not miss, and then print again.
Appendix
10
10-34
Specifications
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dimensions of Each Part
■ Printer unit
• Standard state
(mm)
Front Surface
60
130
Output selection cover
100
Paper cassette
267
399.7
Front cover
Tray extension
150
Auxiliary tray
Multi-purpose tray
385
378.6
94.3
• State with the paper feeder installed
(mm)
Front Surface
130
Front cover
100
Tray extension
356
399.7
Paper cassette
Output selection cover
150
Auxiliary tray
Multi-purpose tray
385
378.6
94.3
Dimensions of Each Part
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10
Appendix
60
10-35
■ PAPER FEEDER PF-35P
(mm)
Front Surface
Appendix
10
10-36
Dimensions of Each Part
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
116.6
117.4
399.7
421.1
Index
10 Indicator, 1-8
100 Indicator, 1-8
2-SIDED PRINT., 6-19, 6-54
2-sided Printing, 4-47
Paper Size Switch Lever, 4-49
A
ADJ.START POS., 6-37
Adjusting the Print Density, 7-18
Adjusting the Printing Position, 7-22
ALT.METHOD, 6-23
APPEND CR TO LF, 6-43
APPLETALK, 6-33
AUTO ERROR SKIP, 6-12, 8-26
AUTO SELECTION, 6-18
Auxiliary Tray, 1-6
B
BIND.LOCATION, 6-21
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL), 10-7
CHK PAPER SIZE, 6-38
CLEANING, 6-48
Cleaning the Fixing Roller, 7-19
Clearing Paper Jams, 8-8
Command Prompt, 3-14
Condensation, 7-17
CONFIG.PAGE, 6-48
Configuration Page, 2-35, 10-2
CONNECT.RECOG., 6-36
CONTROL MENU Options, 6-2
Control Panel, 1-9
COPIES, 6-20
CUSTOM SIZE, 6-42
D
DENSITY, 6-25
DEVICE LOG LIST, 6-49
Device Log List, 10-4
Dimensions, 10-35
Direct Print, 3-8
Display, 1-11
Changing the Language, 2-38
Duplex Unit Cover, 1-8
10
Appendix
Numerics
E
C
Cancel Job, 3-17
Cancel Job Key, 1-10, 5-5
CANCEL JOB Menu, 5-14
Canceling a Job, 3-16
Cassette 1, 4-10
Cassette 2, 4-10
CASSETTE1 SIZE, 4-18, 6-15, 6-54
CASSETTE2 SIZE, 4-18, 6-16, 6-54
Character Code Tables, 10-8
ENLRG A4 WIDTH, 6-44
ENLRG PRT AREA, 6-47
Envelopes, 4-5, 4-39
Error Message, 8-26
Error Skip, 8-26
ETHERNET DRIVER, 6-35
Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-37
F
Face-down Output Tray, 1-7, 4-13
Face-up Output Slot, 1-8, 4-14
FEEDER MENU Options, 6-2
Feeder Selection Key, 1-10, 5-6
FONT NUMBER, 6-41
FONTS LIST, 6-48
Foot Positions, 2-6
Forced Output, 3-16
FORM FEED, 6-51
FORM LINES, 6-41
Front Cover, 1-7
Installation Site, 2-3
Installation Environment, 2-3
Installation Space, 2-5
Installation Space, 2-5
INTERFACE MENU Options, 6-4
INVLDPAPER TRAY, 6-18
ISO Substitution Tables, 10-27
J
Job Indicator, 1-10
Job Key, 1-10, 5-6
JOB LOG LIST, 6-50
JOB Menu, 5-12, 6-9
G
GRADATION LEVEL, 6-24
GUTTER, 6-22
K
Keys, 5-5
H
Appendix
10
HALFTONES, 6-26
Handling
Multi-purpose Tray, 4-12
Paper Cassette, 4-12
Printer, 7-37
Toner Cartridge, 7-14
HARD RESET, 6-51
Hard Reset, 3-19
Heavy Paper, 4-4
How to View the Display, 5-7
I
I/F CONNECTION, 6-27
IMAGING SETUP Options, 6-8
IMGE REFINEMENT, 6-24
Index Card, 4-4
INIT.N/W SET., 6-36
Installation Environment, 2-3
Installation Procedure, 2-2
Installation Requirements, 2-4
10-38
Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
L
Labels, 4-4
LAN, 2-28
LAN Connector, 1-8
Laser Beam, xix
LAYOUT MENU Options, 6-3
Lift Handles, 1-7
M
Menu Categories, 5-4
Menu Functions, 5-2
Menu Functions and Menu Operation, 5-9
Message, 8-26
Message Indicator, 1-10
MODE SELECTION, 6-36
MODE TIMEOUT, 6-27
Multi-purpose Tray, 1-6, 4-33
Handling, 4-12
Paper Size Setting, 4-44
NETWORK MENU, 6-29
Network Status Print, 10-3
NW STATUS PRINT, 6-49
O
Offline, 3-7
OFFSET X, 6-20
OFFSET Y, 6-20
[OK] Key, 1-10, 5-6
Online, 3-6
Online Indicator, 1-10
Online Key, 1-10, 5-5
Open Button, 1-7
Optional Accessories, 1-12
ORIENTATION, 6-40, 6-45
Output Selection Cover, 1-7
Output Trays, 4-13
Paper Capacity, 4-15
Selection, 4-16
Outputting Data (Forced Output), 3-16
P
PANEL LANGUAGE, 6-13
Paper, 4-2
Loading Orientation, 4-51
Print Area, 4-6
Storage, 4-8
Unusable Paper, 4-7
Usable Paper, 4-2
Paper Cassette, 1-7, 4-17
Handling, 4-12
Paper Size Setting, 4-30
Paper Feed Roller, 8-21
Paper Feeder, 1-12
Installation, 9-2
Paper Guides, 1-7
Paper Jams, 8-4
Paper Level Indicator, 1-7
PAPER SAVE (PCL SETUP), 6-40
PAPER SAVE (UFR II SETUP), 6-45
Paper Size, 4-2
Paper Size Switch Lever, 1-8
PAPER SOURCE, 6-53
Paper Source, 4-10
Paper Capacity, 4-10
Selection, 4-11
Paper Source Indicators, 1-9
Paper Type, 4-3
Parts and Their Functions, 1-6
PCL Fonts List, 10-5
PCL SETUP Options, 6-7
PCL UTILITY, 6-48
PDL SELECT(PnP), 6-13
Peripheral Space Required, 2-5
PITCH, 6-41
Plain Paper, 4-4
POINT SIZE, 6-41
Power Cord, 2-26
Power Indicator, 1-9
POWER SAVE MODE, 6-11
POWER SAVE TIME, 6-12
Power Saving, 3-2
Power Socket, 1-7
Power Supply
Connecting the Power Cord, 2-26
Problems, 8-38
Turning the Printer OFF, 2-39
Turning the Printer ON, 2-33
Power Supply Requirements, 2-4
Power Switch, 1-7
Pressure Release Levers, 1-7
Print Mode, 3-15
PRINT MODE Options, 6-6
PRINT POSITION, 6-46
Print Quality Problems, 8-45
Printer
Checking the Operations, 2-35
Cleaning, 7-28
Handling, 7-37
Moving, 7-31
Operation Problems, 8-38
Printer Status to Enter the Menu Operation, 5-4
Printing Position Adjustment Print, 10-3
PRNTPOSNPRINT, 6-49
Problems with the Printout Results, 8-41
PWR SAVE IN ERR, 6-12
Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-39
10
Appendix
N
Q
QUALITY CHANGE, 6-26
QUALITY MENU Options, 6-3
R
T
Rating Label, 1-7
Ready Indicator, 1-9
RECVRY PRINTING, 6-38
REMOTE UI SET., 6-35
REPORTLOG LST, 6-50
Reset Key, 1-9, 5-6
RESET Menu, 5-13, 6-9
Rubber Pads, 4-12
S
Appendix
10
Scalable Fonts (PCL), 10-6
SELECT FEEDER Menu, 5-15, 6-10
Serial No. Label, 1-8
Service Call Display, 8-36
Setting Items, 6-2
Setting Priority, 5-3
Settings Key, 1-10, 5-6
SETUP Menu, 5-9, 6-2
SETUP Menu Initialization, 5-17
SHOW WARNINGS (CONTROL MENU), 6-13
SHOW WARNINGS (IMAGING), 6-46
SHUT DOWN, 6-52
Shutting Down the Printer, 3-4
SMB, 6-33
SNMP V. 1, 6-34
SNMP V. 3 SET., 6-34
SOFT RESET, 6-51
Soft Reset, 3-18
SP.PRINT ADJ A, 6-39
Specifications, 10-31
Controller, 10-33
Hardware, 10-31
Software, 10-34
START WAIT TIME, 6-35
STD PAPER SIZE, 4-18, 4-34, 6-16
10-40
STD PAPER TYPE, 4-18, 4-34, 6-19
Storing Printouts, 4-9
SUBSTITUTE SIZE, 6-39
SYMBOL SET, 6-42
Symbol Sets Supported, 10-8
Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
TCP/IP SETTINGS, 6-29
Temperature/Humidity Conditions, 2-3
Toner Cartridge
Before Replacing, 7-3
Handling, 7-14
Replacement, 7-2, 7-8
Storage, 7-16
Toner Cartridge Guide, 1-8
TONER SAVE, 6-25
Transparencies, 4-4
Transport Guide, 1-8
Tray Extension, 1-7
TRAY PAPER SIZE, 4-33, 6-14, 6-54
TRAY PRIORITY, 6-17
TX/RX Indicator, 1-8
Typeface Samples, 10-6
U
UFR II SETUP Options, 6-8
UNIT OF MEASURE, 6-42
UPDATE FIRMWARE, 6-39
USB, 2-30
USB Connector, 1-8
USER MAIN. Options, 6-7
User Manual CD-ROM Menu, 1-4
Utility Key, 1-9, 5-6
UTILITY Menu, 5-11, 6-9
V
Ventilation Slots, 1-7, 1-8
X
X DIMENSION, 6-42
Y
Y DIMENSION, 6-43
Z
ZOOM, 6-45
Appendix
10
Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10-41
Appendix
10
10-42
Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON COMMUNICATION & IMAGE FRANCE S.A.S.
12, rue de l'Industrie 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
USRM1-2470 (00)
© CANON INC. 2007